JP2017012698A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Game machine

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, whether or not to make a transition to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state when a gaming ball enters the starting port provided in the gaming area A lottery will be held .

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  In view of the above points, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a predetermined acquisition condition being established, and the special information acquired by the information acquisition means Can be executed to determine whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the success / failure information group in the provided information. A grant determination means, a privilege grant means for granting a bonus game to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a specific grant determination result, and stored in the acquisition information storage means Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information is the subject of the grant determination, at a timing before the predetermined special information is the subject of the grant determination The destination specifying means to be determined, and the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means reflects the specification result by the destination specifying means at a timing before the grant determination by the grant determination means. A destination notification unit capable of performing a destination notification; and a destination notification control unit capable of controlling a notification mode of the destination notification executed by the destination notification unit, wherein the destination notification control unit is configured to notify the destination notification. As the mode, at least one of the first destination notification mode and the second destination notification mode different from the first destination notification mode can be selected.
The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the destination notification unit can execute the destination notification on each of the plurality of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit. Yes, the destination notification control means is a predetermined condition in a state where the destination notification in the first destination notification mode and the destination notification in the second destination notification mode are executed by the destination notification means. When is established, it is possible to execute replacement control for switching the first destination notification mode and the second destination notification mode.

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is limited to a prescribed number. Acquisition information storage means that can be stored as, and an assignment determination means capable of performing an assignment determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the success / failure information group in the assignment information, and Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being a specific grant determination result, a bonus granting means for granting a bonus game to the player, and predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means A destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to a determination result in the case of the grant determination target at a timing before the predetermined special information is the grant determination target; A destination capable of executing a destination notification reflecting a result of specification by the destination specifying means at a timing before the predetermined judgment information specified by the destination specifying means is determined to be given by the grant determining means. A notification means and a destination notification control means capable of controlling the notification mode of the destination notification executed by the destination notification means, wherein the destination notification control means is a first destination notification mode as the notification mode of the destination notification. And at least one of the second destination notification mode different from the first destination notification mode can be selected. Thereby, there exists an effect that the attention degree to a game can be raised favorably.
According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. That is, the destination notification unit can execute the destination notification for each of the plurality of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the destination notification control unit is configured to perform the first destination notification mode. In a state where the previous notification and the second notification in the second destination notification mode are being executed by the destination notification means, the first destination notification mode and the second destination when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Replacement control for replacing the previous notification mode can be executed. Thereby, there exists an effect that the attention degree to a game can be raised favorably.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main component parts of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main component parts of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the main components of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. (A) is a perspective view at the time of seeing a distribution prize apparatus from the front, (b) is a top view of a distribution prize apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole electrical structure in a pachinko machine. It is a figure which mainly shows the electric constitution of a main controller. It is a figure which mainly shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success / failure lottery. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st reservation area. It is a figure for demonstrating the special symbol success / failure table storage area, (a) shows the special symbol success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) shows the special symbol success / failure table for high probability modes. It is a figure for demonstrating a distribution table, (a) shows the distribution table (1st distribution information group) for 1st result display parts, (b) is the distribution for 2nd result display parts. A table (second distribution information group) is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending | holding information performed in main side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating a special figure special electricity address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for rounds performed with the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power release process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power closing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice triggered by the winning to the 1st start opening performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice triggered by the winning to the 2nd starting port performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command triggered by the winning to the 1st start opening performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating a general-purpose ordinary telephone address table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demonstration display performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command response process following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding command response process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a figure for demonstrating the sub special symbol reservation ball storage area of audio | voice side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo hold notification lottery process executed by the voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effective lottery process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process performed in audio | voice side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding command response process performed by display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the separate response | compatibility process performed with display side MPU. It is a figure which shows the display screen at the time of receiving the operation alerting | reporting command. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the holding | maintenance symbol displayed on a display screen. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen before replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows a display screen, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b)-(d) has shown the transition state after winning a replacement lottery. . It is a figure which shows the electrical structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus and the display control apparatus mainly in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area of the audio | voice side RAM in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo hold notification lottery process which the audio | voice side MPU in 2nd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the operation effective lottery process which the audio | voice side MPU in 2nd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process which the audio | voice side MPU in 2nd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 2nd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command triggered by the winning to the 1st starting port which the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a figure for demonstrating the reserved symbol displayed on the 1st-8th reserved symbol display area of the symbol display apparatus in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the subordinate special symbol holding ball storage area in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding command response process which the audio | voice side MPU in 3rd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process which the audio | voice side MPU in 3rd Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 3rd Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the upper side display area of the symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation notice triggered by the winning to the 1st starting port which the main side MPU in 4th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo hold notification lottery process which the audio | voice side MPU in 4th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the state in which the holding | maintenance symbol regarding the lottery game in the high probability mode in 4th Embodiment of this invention and the holding | maintenance symbol regarding the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed together, (a) Shows the display screen before the replacement lottery, and (b) shows the display screen after winning the replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the electrical structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus and the display control apparatus mainly in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the subordinate special symbol reservation ball | bowl storage area in 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding command corresponding | compatible process which the audio | voice side MPU in 5th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 5th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. (A) And (b) is a figure for demonstrating the display mode of the symbol display apparatus in 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen on which the character design of the boy and the character design of the girl were displayed together, (b) shows the display screen after replacement. Show. It is a figure which shows the effect displayed on the upper side display area of the display screen in 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding command response process which the audio | voice side MPU in 6th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo hold notification lottery process which the audio | voice side MPU in 6th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a flowchart which shows the replacement process which the audio | voice side MPU in 6th Embodiment of this invention performs. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display screen in 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the display screen before replacement lottery, (b) has shown the display screen after winning a replacement lottery. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the display screen of the modification in 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the modification in 6th Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the state by which the character design of the 1st, 2nd girl was displayed in the assistance zone, (b) is the 1st The character design of the girl of 2 shows the state of winning. It is a front view of the game board in 7th Embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the display mode of the display screen in other embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the display mode of the display screen in other embodiment of this invention. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows the display mode of the display screen in other embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiments, parts that are the same or equivalent to each other will be described with the same reference numerals.

(First embodiment)
An example in which the first embodiment of the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a pachinko machine) 10 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views in which main components of the pachinko machine 10 are developed, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing main components of the pachinko machine 10. 5 is a front view of the game board 43 in the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. 11 and a gaming machine main body 12 that is pivotably attached to the front. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility in the game hall.

  2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit disposed behind the inner frame 13. 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (openable / closable) with respect to the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 has the left side (fixed end side on one end side with respect to the rotation center) as the rotation base end side and the right side (others with respect to the rotation center) as viewed from the front. It is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be able to rotate forward with the open end side on the end side as the rotation tip side. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so that the left side is a rotation base end side and the right side is a rotation front end side and can be rotated rearward in a front view. Yes.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the gaming machine main body 12 has a locked state in which the gaming machine main body 12 cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 on the front end side of the front door frame. A locking device 16 having a function of bringing 14 into a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13 is provided. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 (see FIG. 1) provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door frame 14 is configured by assembling decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 21 opened in a substantially rectangular shape at a substantially central portion. It has been. A window panel 22 having two glass plates that are colorless and transparent is disposed on the back side of the front door frame 14, and a front surface (game area) of a game board 43 to be described later is connected to the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. It is visible from the front side. Note that the window panel 22 may be formed of a synthetic resin so as to be colorless and transparent instead of the plate glass.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, the front door frame 14 includes an upper bulging portion 23 and a lower bulging portion 24 that are projected below the window portion 21 and projecting forward of the front door frame 14. Are lined up and down. As shown in FIG. 4, an upper plate 25 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 23, so that a game ball can be stored in the upper plate 25. Further, the upper plate 25 is formed so that the bottom surface of the opening portion is inclined downward toward the right side of the front view (see FIGS. 1 and 4), and is placed (stored) in the upper plate 25 by the inclination. ) It has a function of guiding the ball to a game ball launching mechanism 44 described later.

  Further, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a first frame button 26 (operation means) at a substantially central portion of an upper surface (a portion of the upper surface that is not opened). A second frame button 27 (operation means) is provided on the right side of the view. The first frame button 26 is operated when changing the displayed stage (background) or displaying the chance up effect of the reach effect or the effect of the notice character displayed on the symbol display device 80 to be described later. The In addition, the first frame button 26 is operated by the player when an opportunity to change the displayed reserved symbol occurs. The second frame button 27 is operated by the player when changing the volume, light amount, or the like controlled by an audio lamp control device 92 described later. In the pachinko machine 10, the first frame button 26 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from above, and the second frame button 27 has a substantially cross shape when viewed from above, but the shape of the first frame button 26 and the second frame button 27 Can be appropriately changed.

  The stage is a production (background) mode that provides uniformity in the production displayed on the symbol display device 80. In the pachinko machine 10, the “underwater stage”, “beach stage”, “city stage” 3 stages are provided. Various effects such as reach effects, which will be described later, are set to be effects that match the theme corresponding to each stage. The stage is changed by the player operating the first frame button 22 during a period when the variable display is not performed on the symbol display device 80 (main display unit 71) described later and during a predetermined period when the variable display is performed. When the first frame button 22 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of “underwater stage” → “beach stage” → “city stage” → “underwater stage”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the upper bulging portion 23 is provided with a ball lending button 28 and a return button 29 on the right side in front of the second frame button 27. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 28 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, according to the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 29 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 25 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine. In this case, a decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball lending button 28 and the return button 29 to make the parts configuration common. Thereby, the common use of the pachinko machine (CR machine) and cash machine using a card unit can be aimed at.

  Inside the lower bulging portion 24, there is provided a lower plate 30 that opens upward similarly to the upper plate 25 and stores balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 25. Note that game balls paid out from a payout device 99 provided on the back pack unit 15 to be described later are discharged to the upper plate 25 and the lower plate 30 through a discharge passage provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. .

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 4, an operation handle 31 that is operated by a player to drive a game ball into the front surface of a game board 43 described later is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 30 as viewed from the front. . Inside the operation handle 31, there is a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the operation handle 31 is touched by a player, and even if the player is rotating the operation handle 31, the game ball A push button type stop switch 31b for stopping the firing (see FIG. 1) and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 31 by a change in electric resistance are incorporated. When the operation handle 31 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 31a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount. The game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes in accordance with the game value, so that the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 43, which will be described later, with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 31 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 31a and the stop switch 31b are off.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a ball removal lever 32 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower plate 30 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 30 downward. The ball release lever 32 is normally arranged in the right direction. When the ball release lever 32 is slid to the left, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 30 opens, and the game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening. Discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 32 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 30 is placed below the lower plate 30.

  In addition, the front door frame 14 is provided with an electrical decoration portion 33 that incorporates light emitting means such as an LED around the window portion 21, and a pair of speaker portions 34 at both left and right end portions above the window portion 21. Is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, at the time of hitting or at the time of reach production, each lighting unit 33 is lit or blinking to notify that it is hitting or reaching, and the speaker unit 34. It is configured to enhance the effect of the game during the game by notifying the player that the player is hitting or reaching. Moreover, the electrical decoration part 33 also exhibits the function as an error lamp which blinks when an error occurs. Further, in the present pachinko machine 10, a plated member 35 made of ABS resin with chrome plating is attached to the area around the electric decoration part 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 41 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole is formed in the center of the resin base 41. 42 is formed. A game board 43 shown in FIG. 5 is detachably attached to the resin base 41, and a game ball launching mechanism 44 that launches a game ball onto the front area of the game board 43 is disposed. The game ball launching mechanism 44 is attached below the window hole 42 in the resin base 41, and a launch rail 45 extending toward a guide rail described later, and a game ball stored in the upper plate 25 on the launch rail 45. And a launching solenoid 47 which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied on the firing rail 45 toward the guide rail. Then, by operating the operation handle 31 provided on the front door frame 14, the launch solenoid 47 is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  Here, the configuration of the game board 43 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. The game board 43 has a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, an inner rail 51, an outer rail 52, a general winning port 53, a first starting port on the front surface of a wooden base plate 50 cut into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. (First starting ball entering portion) 54, second starting port (second starting ball entering portion) 55, variable winning device 56, normal symbol starting gate 57, variable display device unit 58 and the like are assembled. (Refer to FIG. 6 for the first start port 54 and the second start port 55). The general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, the variable winning device 56, the normal symbol starting gate 57, and the variable display device unit 58 are formed in the through holes formed in the base plate 50 by router processing. It is arranged and is fixed from the front side of the game board 43 with wood screws or the like. And such a game board 43 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the inner frame 13 so that the center part of the front surface can be visually recognized through the window part 21 of the front door frame 14. Yes.

  On the back side of the game board 43, detection sensors 53 a, 54 a, 55 a, corresponding to the general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57, respectively. 56c and 57a (see FIG. 10) are provided. When a ball enters the general winning port 53, the first and second starting ports 54 and 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57, the corresponding detecting sensor detects the ball and the detection result is It is output to a main controller 91 described later. For example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the detection sensor, but any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the entry of game balls.

Further, when the occurrence of a ball entering the general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, and the variable winning device 56 is detected, a predetermined number of paid balls are paid out based on the detection result. Is done.
In the present embodiment, when 10 balls are paid out to the general winning opening 53, 10 game balls are paid out, and 15 balls are thrown into the variable winning device 56. When a payout is executed and a ball enters the first and second start ports 54 and 55, the payout of three game balls is executed. The number of these winning balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of winning balls for entering the first starting port 54 may be larger than the number of winning balls for entering the second starting port 55. . Further, the number of winning balls for entering the variable winning device 56 is not limited to a configuration in which the number of winning balls for entering the variable winning device 56 is larger than the number of other winning balls. It is good also as a structure smaller than the number of prize balls with respect to the entrance into.

  The inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 are formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and a game ball launching mechanism The game ball launched from 44 is attached to the base plate 50 so as to be guided to the upper part of the game area. Further, on the front surface of the game board 43, there is disposed a resin connecting member 59 that connects the lower right end portion of the inner rail 51 and the upper right end portion of the outer rail 52 in a front view. Yes. The game area is an area on the front surface of the game board 43 surrounded by the inner rail 51, the outer rail 52, and the connecting member 59, and an area where a game is played by the behavior of the game ball (the game ball that has been launched). Is the area where water flows down).

  Further, a return ball preventing member 60 is attached to the front end side (the upper left portion in FIG. 5) of the inner rail 51, and the game ball once launched to the upper portion (game area) of the game board 43 is guided rail (the inner rail 51). And the outer rail 52 can be prevented from returning into the region). Then, a return rubber 61 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right part in FIG. 5) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 61. The momentum is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  At the lower center of the game board 43 as viewed from the front, there is a distribution winning device 62 that has first and second start ports 54 and 55 inside and guides the game balls to the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. Is provided. Here, the configuration of the distribution winning device 62 will be described. FIG. 6A is a perspective view of the distribution winning device 62 viewed from the front, and FIG. 6B is a top view of the distribution winning device 62.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the allocation prize winning device 62 is provided with an electric accessory 63 in the upper opening (ball entrance). In the normal state (the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode), the electric accessory 63 has an interval in which the facing blades 63a and 63b can enter approximately one game ball (the diameter of the game ball is approximately 11 mm). ) In an upright standing state. That is, in the normal state (the state in which the blades 63a and 63b are erected upward and the electric accessory 63 is in the closed state), the entrance route into the distribution prize device 62 is the blade of the electric accessory 63. There is only a route passing between 63a and 63b, and the player first fires a game ball so that the game ball passes between the blades 63a and 63b of the electric accessory 63.

  In addition to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, the distribution winning device 62 includes a passive portion having a storage portion 64a (first passive portion) and a storage portion 64b (second passive portion). A member (game ball guiding portion) 64 is disposed, and the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 are disposed separately below the passive sorting member 64. When a ball enters the distribution winning device 62 through the blades 63a and 63b, the game ball is received by the storage portion 64a or the storage portion 64b of the passive distribution member 64, and then the weight of the game ball is reached. As a result, the game ball is guided to the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 as the passive distribution member 64 rotates. For example, when a game ball is received in the housing portion 64a, the passive sorting member 64 rotates counterclockwise (second direction) in front view (see FIG. 6A) due to the weight of the game ball. Is guided to the first start port 54. Similarly, when a game ball is received in the accommodating portion 64b, the passive sorting member 64 rotates clockwise (first direction) in front view according to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is moved to the second start port 55. And induce. Each of the passive distribution members 64 is configured to be rotatable about 90 degrees around the left and right, and a magnet (rotation restricting means) 64c is provided on a boundary wall between the storage portion 64a and the storage portion 64b. .

  Further, a base body 65 is provided on the back side of the distribution winning device 62, and the base body 65 has a base side magnet (at a position corresponding to the position on the center line between the blades 63a and 63b). A rotation restricting means) 65a is arranged. The polarity on the base-side magnet 65a side of the magnet 64c of the passive distribution member 64 and the polarity on the magnet 64c-side of the base-side magnet 65a are opposite to each other. Specifically, the magnet 64c is composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is configured such that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip on the base body 65 side. Similarly, the base-side magnet 65a is composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is configured such that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip portion on the passive sorting member 64 side.

  For this reason, when the passive distribution member 64 rotates, the base side magnet 65a and the passive member are passively moved at a position where the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 64a and the accommodating portion 64b is located directly above (on the center line of the interval between the facing blades 63a and 63b). The magnet 64c of the sorting member 64 is the closest position (tips face each other), but the magnets 64c and 65a are arranged so that the polarities are the same (for example, N pole and N pole). Therefore, the rebound is maintained, and the boundary wall of the passive sorting member 64 does not stop at a position facing directly upward, and is maintained at a position rotated to the left or right.

  Thereby, the passive distribution member 64 rotates the passive distribution member 64 to the left or right when the magnet 64c and the base-side magnet 65a are repelled, and the magnet 64c moves the blade 63a and the blade 63b of the electric accessory 63. It becomes difficult to become a position (upward position) on the center line between the two. In other words, either the storage portion 64a or the storage portion 64b faces the side (the upper side of the pachinko machine 10) that receives a game ball that enters the distribution prize device 62. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball that has entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the storage portion 64a and the storage portion 64b and causing a clogged ball.

  In addition, the magnet 64c and the base-side magnet 65a are repelled, so that, for example, after the storage unit 64a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first start port 54, the passive vibration is generated. It is possible to prevent the minute member 64 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 64a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the game ball to the first start port 54, the storage portion 64b is in a state of facing upward, and the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 62 next is received by the storage portion 64b, The passive sorting member 64 rotates about 90 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the second starting port 55. As described above, the passive distribution member 64 can alternately guide the game balls entering the distribution winning device 62 to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55. Therefore, the game balls can be equally distributed to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 to enter, and a lottery game (first game) triggered by entering the first start port 54, which will be described later. A lottery game) and a lottery game (second lottery game) triggered by entering the second start port 55 can be executed alternately and efficiently.

  In the above description, the mechanical component (the configuration of game balls distributed by the passive distribution member 64) has been described as the distribution winning device 62. However, every time a game ball wins, the first lottery game start opportunity And the second lottery game start opportunity may be arranged alternately. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a mechanism for distributing game balls on the game board 43, and the game area can be effectively utilized.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 57 is provided on the left side of the center of the game board 43 as viewed from the front. When the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the corresponding detection sensor 57a (see FIG. 10) detects the passage (entrance) of the game ball, and the detection result is output to the main controller 91 described later. Is done. Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57, the main controller 91 described later determines whether or not the normal symbol is hit (determination whether or not the electric accessory 63 is to be opened). If the determination result is a win (the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric accessory open state), the electric accessory driving unit 63c (see FIG. 10) is driven to open the electric accessory 63. Thus, it becomes easy for the game balls to enter the distribution prize device 62. In other words, the game ball can easily enter the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

  Although specifically described later, in the present embodiment, a high probability mode and a low probability mode are mounted, and in the high probability mode, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and the electric accessory 63 is easily opened. It has become. For this reason, in the high probability mode (during the high frequency support mode), it is advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 57 to open the electric accessory 63, so that the game ball is a symbol. The game ball is fired so as to pass through the left side of the display device 80 (so-called left-handed).

  The variable winning device 56 is disposed on the lower right side of the game board 43 when viewed from the front, and has a large winning opening 56a that leads to the back side of the gaming board 43, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate 56b that covers the large winning opening 56a, A variable prize driving unit 56d (see FIG. 10) such as a solenoid for driving the opening / closing plate 56b to open / close forward is used with the lower side of the opening / closing plate 56b as an axis. The special winning opening 56a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. When it is determined that the main control device 91, which will be described later, has won the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (the winning lottery has been won), the variable winning drive unit 56d is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate 56b downward on the front side. Then, an open state in which the game ball easily enters the big winning opening 56a is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated. For example, the special winning opening 56a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or 10 game balls are entered). The opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 56 is determined according to the determined winning type. For example, in the case of a 16R probability variation result to be described later, it is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). A payout is made. For this reason, during the opening / closing execution mode, the player launches the game ball so that the game ball passes through the right side of the symbol display device 80 and enters the big winning opening 56a (so-called right hit). The opening / closing execution mode refers to a mode that is entered when a lottery regarding the winning of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is won in the main controller 91 described later, and this opening / closing execution mode will be described later. To do.

  A plurality of general winning ports 53 are provided below the game board 43 in a front view (left and right of the distribution winning device 62). In addition, an out port 66 is provided at the bottom of the front view of the game board 43 so that game balls that have not entered the various winning ports are discharged from the game area through the out port 66. .

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. In the present specification, a game ball entered into the general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, and the variable winning device 56 (large winning port 56a) is also expressed as winning.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 43 as viewed from the front, an adhering space 70 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided. It can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the 14 window portions 21.

  Further, a main display portion 71 composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is provided at the lower left corner of the game board 43 as viewed from the front (outside the outer rail 52). The main display portion 71 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 21 of the front door frame 14.

  The main display unit 71 is based on the first result display unit 71a indicating the result of the first lottery game performed by the main controller 91 based on the winning at the first starting port 54 and the winning at the second starting port 55. When the variable winning device 56 enters the opening / closing execution mode by winning the winning lottery, the second result display portion 71b showing the result of the second lottery game performed by the main controller 91 (or the opening / closing execution mode). A round display unit 71c indicating the number of times the variable winning device 56 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Specifically, in the first result display portion 71a, a variable display regarding the first lottery game is performed, and the variable display (flashing) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the first lottery game has elapsed. After the display), the change display is stopped and displayed in a lighting state indicating the result of the first lottery game. When the lottery result of the first lottery game is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display portion 71a and the variable display is stopped. Later, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display portion 71b, the variable display regarding the second lottery game is performed, and the variable display (flashing display) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the second lottery game elapses. After that, as a result of stopping the variable display, the change display is stopped and displayed in a lighting state indicating the result of the second lottery game. When the lottery result of the second lottery game is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display portion 71b and the variable display is stopped. Later, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, based on the first and second lottery games (winning to either the first or second starting port 54 or 55), the corresponding first and second result display portions 71a and 71b are displayed in a variable manner. The period from the start to the display of a predetermined stop result until the change display is stopped corresponds to one game time (change display time). However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and the single result display unit is provided in both the first and second lottery games. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed as one game time. To do.

  Further, the main display unit 71 includes a display unit 71d in addition to the first and second result display units 71a and 71b and the round display unit 71c. In the other display portion 71d, for example, a variable display is performed in response to a winning at the normal symbol starting gate 57, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on a winning at the normal symbol starting gate 57 is performed. Results are shown. When the result of the internal lottery triggered by the winning of the normal symbol start gate 57 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the electric accessory, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the other display portion 71d. After the lighting is displayed, the state shifts to the electric accessory open state. In the electric combination release state, the electric combination 63 is in an open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the distribution prize device 62. That is, in the open state of the electric accessory, the game ball can easily win the first and second start ports 54 and 55.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate 57 while the variable display with the winning to the normal symbol start gate 57 is performed in the other display portion 71d, the number of passages is a maximum of four in this embodiment. The number of hold times is also displayed. Furthermore, when a game ball wins the first and second start ports 54 and 55 while the variable display is performed on the first result display portion 71a or the second result display portion 71b, the number of wins is determined in this embodiment. Up to four times for the first start port 54 and up to four times for the second start port 55, the number of times of the hold is also displayed.

  The plurality of LEDs constituting the main display unit 71 are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, so that the pachinko machine 10 includes fewer LEDs depending on the combination of the light emission colors. Various gaming states can be suggested. The main display unit 71 may be configured using another display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

  The variable display device unit 58 is disposed in the center of the game board 43. This variable display unit 58 displays the lottery result of the first lottery game by variably displaying the first special symbol while synchronizing with the variation display in the first result display portion 71a, and also varies in the second result display portion 71b. A symbol display device 80 that displays the lottery result of the second lottery game by variably displaying the second special symbol while synchronizing with the display, and a center frame 81 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 80 are provided. . The center frame 81 is installed with the upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen 80a is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

The symbol display device 80 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 17 inches.
Then, as shown in FIG. 7, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first game lottery triggered by the winning at the first starting port 54 and the first trigger triggered by the winning at the second starting port 55. Upper upper display area Dm for displaying the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the two lottery game, and lower lower display area Ds for displaying the holding symbol (the first lottery game and the second lottery game hold) have.

  In the symbol display device 80, the display content of the display screen 80a is controlled by a display control device 93 described later. The symbol display device 80 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the upper display area Dm is displayed variably as the symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the horizontal direction. Then, the variable display on the symbol display device 80 (display screen 80a) is started in response to winning at the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. That is, when variable display is performed on the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 80 accordingly. Then, for example, the symbol display device 80 sets in advance the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability change in which the large winning opening 56a of the variable winning device 56 is opened 16 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  The first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in the upper display area Dm are nine kinds of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9” shown in FIGS. 8 (j) and a sub-pattern composed of a shell-shaped picture design shown in FIG. 8 (k). More specifically, the main symbol is composed of nine types of character symbols such as octopus and the like, each of which is provided with numbers “1” to “9”, and a whale character symbol.

  In the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of the upper, middle, and lower rows are set, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has a predetermined main symbol and a sub-symbol. It is configured to be arranged cyclically in order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers (descending order with respect to the changing direction of the symbols), and between the main symbols. The sub-design is arranged one by one. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine kinds of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the direction of variation of the symbols), and one sub symbol is provided between the main symbols. It is arranged one by one.

  That is, each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of numbers (ascending order with respect to the direction of symbol variation), and then the main symbol of “9” is arranged. The main symbol of “4” (or the whale character shown in FIG. 8 (j)) is additionally arranged between the main symbol of “1” and “1”, and one sub symbol is placed between each of the main symbols. It is arranged. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  In the upper display area Dm, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set in the upper display area Dm.

  Then, when an effect for game times (variable display times) is performed in the upper display area Dm triggered by winning a prize at the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed. The variable display is started so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. After that, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The production of is ended.

  In addition, when the effect for the game round is finished, if it is a game round corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any of the active lines is formed, or After the whale character symbol shown in FIG. 8 (j) is statically displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the effect for the game rotation is ended, and a winning animation is displayed as a transition to the opening / closing execution mode (occurrence of a winning result). It has become so. However, the whale character symbol shown in FIG. 8 (j) in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped only when a hit result occurs, and in a normal game round (outside game round), the whale character The main symbol “4” is displayed in the symbol portion.

  As described above, the symbol display device 80 (the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b) fluctuates when one of the first and second start ports 54 and 55 is won. A period from when the display is started, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above-mentioned variation display is stopped corresponds to one game time. In addition, the design of the symbol variation display in the symbol display device 80 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Further, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 80 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8, and for example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  On the other hand, the lower display area Ds is provided horizontally longer than the upper display area Dm. In the lower display area Ds, in this pachinko machine 10, winnings (first lottery game or second lottery game) to the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 are each held for a maximum of four times. Therefore, a total of up to eight can be reserved as a whole, so that it is equally divided into first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of eight small areas in the left-right direction. In the following description, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas are also referred to as reserved symbol display areas Ds *, and * indicates a corresponding character among the numbers 1 to 8. That is, the reserved symbol display area Ds * indicates a corresponding one of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8.

Then, when a game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing in the upper display area Dm, the first lottery game or the second The start of the 2 lottery game is suspended, and in the display areas of the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds1 are not displayed. The holding symbol of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is displayed in the holding symbol display area (left holding symbol display area) Ds * having the smallest number among Ds8.
In the present embodiment, “◯” is basically displayed as the reserved symbols of the first and second lottery games. In addition, as a hold pattern of the first and second lottery games, let the player know in advance that a reach result may occur or a winning result may occur (a winning lottery may be won) (expectation) ")" Is displayed as the reserved symbol. Hereinafter, the hold symbol “◯” is also referred to as a hold non-notification symbol (first destination notification), and the hold symbol “●” is also referred to as a hold notification symbol (second destination notification).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed in order to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 by the distribution winning device 62 (see FIG. 6). For this reason, for example, when the first special symbol is changing and no reserved symbols are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds1 are displayed. The holding symbol of the second lottery game is displayed in the first holding symbol display area (the holding symbol display area on the left side) Ds1 of the smallest number among Ds8, and then the holding symbol of the first lottery game, the second lottery game The reserved symbols are displayed alternately with the reserved symbols.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 43), there is a main control device 91 that controls the main game, and a voice lamp control device that controls voice and lamp display. 92 and a display control device 93 that controls the symbol display device 80 are mounted.

  Each of these control devices 91 to 93 is configured such that each control board is accommodated in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Each board box includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are separated from each other by means of preventing separation (or It is sealed by being inseparably connected by a box connecting portion as a connecting means). And the board | substrate box is connected by these box coupling | bond parts so that separation | separation is impossible, and when the internal space of a board | substrate box is open | released, it has the structure which needs the destruction of the said board | substrate box, or partial excision. For example, a plurality of box coupling portions are provided in the long side portion of the substrate box, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box coupling portion as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but the box base and the box can be inserted by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion. The cover is connected to the cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one long hole among the plurality of box coupling portions. And when opening the board box in the event of a failure of the accommodated control board or inspecting the control board, etc., the connection part between the box joint part where the locking claw is inserted and the other box joint part The connecting portion between the box coupling portion and the box body is cut. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the board box are separated, and the internal control board can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, a locking claw may be inserted into the long hole of another box coupling portion. If a history of opening the board box is left in the board box, it can be easily found whether or not an illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box.

  In addition, a plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting bases of the control devices 91 to 93, and the board box and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is combined with the.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering the unauthorized opening of the substrate box, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the sticking location, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  3 and 9, the back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 91, the display controller 93, and the sound lamp controller 92. Yes. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 94 having transparency, and a payout mechanism unit 95 and a control device assembly unit 96 are attached to the back pack 94.

  The payout mechanism 95 includes a tank 97 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 98 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 97 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 98 and a payout device 99 for paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 10). The game balls paid out from the payout device 99 are discharged to the upper plate 25 or the lower plate 30 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 99. Note that a vibrator (not shown) for applying vibration to the tank rail 98 is attached to the tank rail 98. The payout mechanism unit 95 is mounted with a back pack substrate that is supplied with, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply and is provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the control device assembly unit 96 generates and outputs predetermined power required by the payout control device 100 having a function of controlling the payout device 99, various control devices, and the like. And a power supply control device 101 for controlling the launch of the game ball in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 31. The payout control device 100 and the power supply / launch control device 101 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 100 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the payout control device 100 is provided with a state return switch 102, and the power supply and launch control device 101 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob (not shown) and a RAM erase switch 103. Yes. The state return switch 102 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging of the payout motor 99a (see FIG. 10). The operation knob is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid 47. The RAM erase switch 103 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  The payout control device 100, the power source and the launch control device 101 are configured such that a control board or the like is housed in a board box as in the case of each control apparatus described above, and the same fraud prevention means as described above is provided. . In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack 94 is provided with an external output terminal plate 104 at the upper corner portion on the rotating shaft side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal plate 104 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 97 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. State transition such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a loan is lent, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode At this time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal for outputting a signal is provided. And the signal regarding the state of the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

  Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine. Each control device (each control board), which will be described in detail later, is an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, and random number generation used in various lotteries. And a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are mounted as necessary.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. 10 to 12 are block diagrams showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 10 mainly shows the overall configuration, FIG. 11 mainly shows the configuration of the main controller 91, and FIG. The structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 92 and the display control apparatus 93 is shown. In FIG. 10, operating power supply lines from the power supply and launch control device 101 to the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 are indicated by double arrows, and other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by solid arrows. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the main control device 91 includes a main control board 111 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 112 is mounted on the main control board 111, and a ROM 113 and a RAM 114 are built in the MPU 112. Hereinafter, the MPU 112, the ROM 113, and the RAM 114 of the main controller 91 will be described as the main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114.

  The main ROM 113 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require an external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The main ROM 113 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 112. For example, as shown in FIG. 11, a special symbol admission table storage area 113a, a distribution table Storage area 113b, reach table storage area 113c, variable display time table storage area 113d, stop result table storage area 113e, normal symbol success / failure table storage area 113f, special figure special electricity address table storage area 113g, ordinary figure ordinary telephone address table storage It has an area 113h, an update data table storage area 113i, and a command information storage area 113j.

  The main-side RAM 114 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage and retention, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the main ROM 113. The main RAM 114 temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the main ROM 113 is executed. The main RAM 114 includes, for example, a lottery counter buffer 114a, a special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b, a normal symbol reservation ball storage area 114c, a special symbol special electricity counter area 114d, a special symbol special electricity timer counter area 114e, and a high probability mode flag storage area. 114f, high-probability game number counter area 114g, ordinary figure ordinary electric counter area 114h, ordinary figure ordinary electric timer counter area 114i, various hit result flag storage areas 114j, other various counter areas 114k, and other various flag storage areas 114m ing.

  In addition to the above elements, the main control board 111 or the main MPU 112 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the main MPU 112 has a single-chip configuration including the main ROM 113 and the main RAM 114. The main MPU 112, the main ROM 113, and the main RAM 114 are individually chipped. A configuration may be adopted. The same applies to each control device described later other than the main control device 91.

  The main MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port (not shown). Note that an input / output port may be provided instead of the input port and the output port, and the input port and the output port may be switched as necessary. The same applies to the MPUs of the control devices described later other than the main control device 91. Various control devices 92 and 100 are connected to the input side and output side of the main side MPU 112, and various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, various drive units 56d and 63c, and a main unit are connected. A display unit 71 is connected. First, the connection configuration of the various detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, 115, the various drive units 56d, 63c, and the main display unit 71 will be described. The detection sensor 115 is a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, a vibration detection sensor, or the like.

  On the input side of the main MPU 112, a prize detection provided for the game area general winning port 53, the first starting port 54, the second starting port 55, the variable winning device 56, and the normal symbol starting gate 57. Sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a (hereinafter collectively referred to as winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. In this case, the main control board 111 and each winning detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a may be connected via one electrical wiring, and a relay board is interposed in the middle of each signal path. It is good also as composition which is doing. The same applies to the configuration related to connection with other devices. The main MPU 112 receives signals from the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a through the winning ICs 116 mounted on the main control board 111, and determines a winning determination for each winning portion based on the reception result. (Entry check) is performed. In addition, the main MPU 112 executes a winning lottery (first and second lottery games) triggered by winnings at the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55, and also wins the normal symbol starting gate 57. Based on this, an electric-powered article opening lottery (support lottery) is executed.

  The winning IC 116 is a path abnormality confirmation means or a path abnormality confirmation circuit, and a normal signal is transmitted between each winning detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a and the main MPU 112 by the winning IC 116. Check if transmission is taking place.

  In addition to the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a, other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the input side of the main MPU 112 via electric wiring. Are electrically connected. The main MPU 112 receives signals from other detection sensors 115 such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor, and based on the reception result, determines whether or not an abnormality that is a detection target has occurred. To do.

  On the output side of the main MPU 112, a variable prize driving unit 56d that opens and closes the opening / closing plate 56b of the variable prize winning device 56 and an electric combination driving unit 63c that opens and closes the electric combination 63 are electrically connected via electric wiring. Connected. The main display unit 71 is electrically connected to the output side of the main MPU 112 via electric wiring. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, through which the main MPU 112 performs drive control of the variable prize driving unit 56d and the electric accessory driving unit 63c, and displays on the main display unit 71. Execute control.

  For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 56d is executed in the main MPU 112 so that the special winning opening 56a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 63 is won, the main MPU 112 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 63c so that the electric combination 63 is opened and closed. Further, in each game round, display control of the main display unit 71 (first and second result display units 71a and 71b) is executed in the main MPU 112. When the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 63 is to be opened is displayed, the display control of the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d) is executed in the main MPU 112.

  The main MPU 112 sets information according to the progress of the game in the main RAM 114. Although not shown in FIG. 10, an external output terminal board 104 (see FIG. 3) is connected to the output side of the main MPU 112, and the main MPU 112 performs a signal according to information set in the main RAM 114. Setting for output is performed on the external output terminal board 104, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer of the game hall.

  Next, a configuration in connection (communication) between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 will be described. First, before describing the configuration of these connections (communication), the electrical configuration of the payout control apparatus 100 will be described.

  The payout control apparatus 100 includes a payout control board 121 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout apparatus 99. The payout control board 121 includes an MPU 122, and the MPU 122 includes a ROM 123 and a RAM 124. . Hereinafter, the MPU 122, the ROM 123, and the RAM 124 provided in the payout control apparatus 100 are referred to as the payout side MPU 122, the payout side ROM 123, and the payout side RAM 124.

  The payout-side ROM 123 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, as a read-only memory. The payout side ROM 123 stores various control programs executed by the payout side MPU 122 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RAM 124 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout-side ROM 123. The payout side RAM 124 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the payout side ROM 123. In addition, the payout control board 121 or the payout side MPU 122 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit and the like in addition to the above-described elements.

  The payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the payout device 99. The payout device 99 is switched between a state in which the game balls supplied from the tank 97 to the payout device 99 are prevented from passing downstream so as not to flow downstream and a state in which the game balls are sent downstream. A payout motor 99a for driving a ball stopper member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 99b for individually detecting game balls sent to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 99a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 122 via an electrical wiring, and a payout detection sensor 99b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 122 via an electrical wiring. Has been. The payout-side MPU 122 supplies a drive signal to the payout motor 99a via a driver circuit provided on the payout control board 121 to execute payout of the game ball, and payout based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 99b. Know the number of completed game balls.

  Further, the payout-side MPU 122 is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 131 provided in the back pack unit 15 via electric wiring, and the ball lending connection terminal plate 131 is connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 131 via electric wiring. Is electrically connected to the card unit. Thereby, the player can receive the rental of the game ball by manually operating the ball rental button 28 provided on the pachinko machine 10 as appropriate. The payout-side MPU 122 executes control of rental balls by transmitting and receiving electrical signals to and from the card unit.

  Further, in addition to the payout device 99 and the card unit, the payout side MPU 122 is electrically connected to a full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting whether the game ball is full in the lower plate 30 as a ball receiving tray. In addition, a no-sphere detection sensor (not shown) for detecting whether the tank 97 is in a no-sphere state is electrically connected.

  Then, the payout MPU 122 controls the payout of the game ball based on communication with the main MPU 112. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 111 and the payout control device 100.

  For details on the signal path, when the main MPU 112 confirms winning in the winning portion corresponding to the generation of the winning ball based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56c, the main MPU 112 is directed toward the payout MPU 122. A prize ball command (payout command information) is transmitted, and a first signal path SL1 is provided to transmit the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits.

  There are a plurality of prize ball commands, and the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113 is referred to. When the winning to the general winning opening 53 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output. When the winning to the variable winning device 56 is specified, 13 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of game balls is output and a winning to the first and second start ports 54 and 55 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three game balls is output. The

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication when performing communication of the prize ball command. That is, the information of multiple bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The first signal path SL1 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrical connection to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be formed by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

  In addition, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided as signal paths for transmitting information from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112. The payout status command includes a prize ball completion command indicating the completion of the prize ball and the number of the prize balls completed, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the game ball payout, An abnormal termination command indicating that the abnormality has been released is included. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of the command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits. The predetermined abnormality related to the game ball payout includes, for example, a full state of the lower plate 30 and a no-ball state of the tank 97.

  In communication of the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, a plurality of bits of information included in the payout status command are sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electric wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be formed by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

  The third signal path SL3 is used for transmitting a payout permission signal from the payout MPU 121 toward the main MPU 112. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout MPU 122 to the main MPU 112 so that the main MPU 112 can grasp the output timing of the prize ball command.

  The payout permission signal is composed of 1-bit information, and a LOW level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and an HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. The However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a HI level signal is transmitted when the prize ball command output is prohibited, and a LOW level signal is outputted when the prize ball command output is permitted. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  The third signal path SL3 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 are provided at both ends of the electric wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be formed by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

  As described above, the command communication between the main side MPU 112 and the payout side MPU 122 is not the parallel communication but the serial communication, so that the electric wiring for electrically connecting the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is assumed. Even if an illegal act using a so-called hanging board to connect an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden in the electrical wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to illegally receive a large amount of game balls, and the signal path between the main control board 111 and the payout control board 121 is likely to be targeted. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 112 and the payout MPU 122, if parallel communication is adopted as command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-mentioned unauthorized board becomes It becomes easy to hide by electric wiring. On the other hand, when the command communication is performed by serial communication, the illegal board is not easily hidden in the electric wiring, and it is easy to find it when the board is temporarily installed.

  Next, a configuration in electrical connection between the main control device 91 and the payout control device 100 and the power supply and launch control device 101 will be described.

  The power supply and launch control apparatus 101 includes a power supply and launch control board 141, and the power supply and launch control board 141 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control apparatus 91 and the payout control apparatus 100. A power supply circuit 142 is provided. The power supply circuit 142 is provided with a power-on power supply unit 143 and a power-off power supply unit 144.

  The power-on power supply unit 143 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main controller 91, the payout controller 100, etc. The operation voltage required for each is generated, and the generated operation voltage is supplied to the main control device 91, the payout control device 100, and the like. As its outline, the power-on power supply unit 143 takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied through the connection board provided in the back pack unit 15 and + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, etc. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V and + 5V voltages are supplied to the main controller 91, the payout controller 100, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, the main controller 91 is provided with a power failure monitoring board 117 in the middle of the power supply path between the power-on power supply unit 143 and the main-side MPU 112. The power failure monitoring board 117 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power-on power supply unit 143. Then, when this voltage is less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power interruption signal) to the main MPU 112 is set to correspond to the occurrence of a power failure (power interruption). Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has occurred. .
The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

  The power supply unit 144 for power interruption includes a capacitor. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 143 for power supply is used. Charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in an OFF state or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off), the power supply unit 144 is discharged from the power interruption. As a result, storage holding power (backup power) is supplied to the main RAM 114. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 114 is stored and held without being erased while the power for storing and holding is supplied from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption.

Note that the capacity of the power supply unit 144 for power interruption is relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 114 before the power interruption is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). .
The configuration of the power interruption power supply unit 144 is not limited to the capacitor, and may be a battery, a non-rechargeable battery, or the like. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, it is not necessary to store power to the power supply unit 144 for power interruption when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  Although not shown in the figure, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption. In the power supply and launch control board 141, even after the DC stable power supply of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit for power failure processing is discharged for a time sufficient for execution of power failure processing. The system is configured to maintain an output of 5 volts, which is a drive power source of the system, at a normal value. Thus, the main MPU 112 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  Here, the configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 142 to the main MPU 112 and the payout MPU 122 will be described.

  The power from the power-on power supply unit 143 is supplied to the VCC terminal of the main MPU 112 and the VCC terminal of the payout MPU 122. In a situation where power is supplied from the commercial power supply by the power supplied to the VCC terminal, various control processes are executed in the MPUs 112 and 122, and information is stored and held in the RAMs 114 and 124. Is called.

  On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 112 but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout MPU 122. That is, the power for storing and holding power from the power supply unit 144 for power interruption is supplied to the main RAM 114 but not supplied to the payout RAM 124. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the main RAM 114 stores information, but the payout RAM 124 does not store information. Note that the VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 122 is grounded or not connected to any electrical wiring.

  As described above, the storage holding power from the power interruption time power supply unit 144 is supplied to the main RAM 114 but not supplied to the payout side RAM 124, thereby reducing the capacity of the power interruption time power supply unit 144. Is planned. Thereby, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition to the power supply circuit 142, the power supply and launch control board 141 is provided with a launch control circuit 145 responsible for launch control of game balls. The firing control circuit 145 is provided with a transmission circuit 146 that satisfies a condition, a receiving circuit 147 that is permitted to fire, and a launching IC 148.

  The condition establishment transmission circuit 146 has a function of transmitting a condition establishment signal having a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 112 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is established. Specifically, the launch control circuit 145 has a touch sensor 31a for detecting that the annular handle portion of the operation handle 31 is touched by the player and a game even when the handle portion is being rotated. A stop switch 31b which is manually operated by the player to stop the ball firing is electrically connected. Further, the launch control circuit 145 is electrically connected to the payout control board 121 and inputs a signal indicating whether or not the card unit is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal board 131.

  The transmission circuit 146 that satisfies the condition receives a signal indicating that the handle is being touched by the player from the touch sensor 31a, and receives a signal indicating that the player is not manually operated from the stop switch 31b. Further, when a signal indicating that the card unit is connected is received from the payout side MPU 122, a HI level condition establishment signal (a signal corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main side MPU 112. If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main MPU 112. Further, the configuration is not limited to this, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

  The firing permission receiving circuit 147 permits the HI level firing permission transmitted from the main MPU 112 on the condition that the HI level condition satisfying signal is transmitted from the condition satisfying transmission circuit 146 to the main MPU 112. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) and continuously supplying the corresponding signal to the launch IC 148 when the launch permission signal is received. The main side MPU 112 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when it does not receive a HI level condition fulfillment signal from the condition fulfillment transmission circuit 146. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main side MPU 112 newly starts transmission of the HI level firing permission signal every time reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is started, and when reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is completed, The transmission permission signal is terminated.

When the launch IC 148 receives the launch permission signal of HI level or a signal corresponding thereto from the launch permission receiving circuit 147, the launch IC 148 is connected to each of the launch solenoid 47 and the ball feeder 46 of the game ball launch mechanism 44. It has a function of outputting a drive signal periodically.
In this case, launch IC 148 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeding device 46 than in the firing solenoid 47 so that the game ball is fired after one game ball is supplied to the firing rail 45.

  Further, the operation handle 31 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount as described above, and the launch IC 148 is based on a voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the drive signal supplied to the firing solenoid 47. For this reason, the greater the amount of operation of the operation handle 31, the stronger the launch strength of the game ball by the launch solenoid 47. It is not essential that the adjustment function is provided in the launch IC 148, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 148 and the launch solenoid 47.

  Next, a configuration in electrical connection between the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The sound lamp control device 92 includes a sound lamp control board 151. The sound lamp control board 151 includes an MPU 152. The MPU 152 includes a ROM 153 and a RAM 154. Hereinafter, the MPU 152, the ROM 153, and the RAM 154 provided in the audio lamp control device 92 will be described as the audio side MPU 152, the audio side ROM 153, and the audio side RAM 154.

  The voice-side ROM 153 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory and a NAND flash memory, as a read-only memory. The voice ROM 153 stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the voice MPU 152. For example, the operation notification lottery table storage area 153a, the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b, and the replacement It has a lottery table storage area 153c, a command information storage area 153d, and the like.

The operation notification lottery table storage area 153a is an area in which an operation notification lottery table that is referred to in an operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42, S2404) described later is stored.
The hold notification lottery table storage area 153b is an area in which a hold notification lottery table that is referred to in a hold notification lottery process (S2203 in FIG. 39, S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 41) described later is stored. The replacement lottery table storage area 153c is an area in which a replacement lottery table that is referred to in the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) described later is stored. The command information storage area 153d is an area in which command information referred to when generating various commands output from the voice MPU 152 is stored.

  The voice-side RAM 154 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for readout is faster than that of the voice ROM 153. The voice side RAM 154 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the voice side ROM 153 is executed. The voice side RAM 154 includes, for example, a command storage area 154a, a secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b, an operation valid flag storage area 154c, an operation notification lottery counter area 154d, a hold notification lottery counter area 154e, a holding data area 154f, and a replacement. It has a lottery counter area 154g and other various counter areas 154h.

  The command storage area 154a is an area for storing a command received from the main MPU 112. The slave special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b, which will be specifically described later, follows the special symbol reserve ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114, and includes slave first to slave eighth reserve areas RC1 to RC8. The slave first to slave eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8 have various flag storage areas 211 to 215 (see FIG. 40). The operation valid flag storage area 154c is an area in which an operation valid flag is stored when an operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42, S2404) described later is won. The operation notification lottery counter area 154d is an area in which an operation notification lottery counter from which a value is read in an operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42, S2404) described later is stored. The hold notification lottery counter area 154e is an area in which a hold notification lottery counter from which a value is read in a hold notification lottery process (S2203 in FIG. 39, S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 41) described later is stored. The holding data area 154f is data temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, as well as to notify the voice side MPU 152 even after the effects and notifications are started. This is an area for storing and holding data that can be used independently. The replacement lottery counter area 154g is an area in which a hold notification lottery counter from which a value is read out in a replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) described later is stored. Various other counter areas 154h are areas in which a game number counter, an operation valid timer counter, and the like are stored.

  Then, in the voice side MPU 152, based on various commands received from the main control device 91 (a variation command, a type command, a fixed stop command, an opening command, an ending command, a hold command, etc. described later) The contents of the performance to be executed in the above are determined. Then, the lamp control device 155 is controlled to perform the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 and the sound output device 156 is controlled to perform the sound control of the speaker unit 34 so that the operation corresponding to the determined content is performed. Do. The first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are electrically connected to the input side of the audio side MPU 152. Then, the audio side MPU 152 monitors whether or not the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated. When the first and second frame buttons 26 and 27 are operated, processing corresponding to the operation is executed. To do. Further, the voice side MPU 152 specifies whether or not notification is necessary based on the command received from the main control device 91, and performs the light emission control of the lamp control device 155 and the voice control of the voice output device 156. Notification.

  Various commands output from the main MPU 112 will be described in detail later. These various commands are output with reference to the command information storage area 113j of the main ROM 113. The various commands are configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes. The command transmission from the main MPU 112 to the voice MPU 152 is basically performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

  The audio side MPU 152 is electrically connected to the display control device 93 and transmits various commands including the contents of effects determined based on the command received from the main control device 91 to the display control device 93. Note that various commands output from the voice-side MPU 152 are referred to the command information storage area 153d of the voice-side ROM 153. Further, the display control device 93 of the present embodiment is not configured to receive a command from the main control device 91 without going through the sound lamp control device 92, and the sound lamp control device in relation to the main control device 91. It can be said that it exists on the downstream side of the communication direction from 92.

  The display control device 93 includes a display control board 161, and an MPU 162 is mounted on the display control board 161, and a program ROM 163 and a work RAM 164 are built in the MPU 162. The display control board 161 includes a VDP (video display processor) 165, a character ROM 166, and a video RAM 167. Hereinafter, the MPU 162 of the display control device 93 will be described as the display-side MPU 162.

  The program ROM 163 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage unit) that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The program ROM 163 stores various control programs executed by the display side MPU 162 and fixed value data. For example, a command information storage area 163a referred to when a command to the VDP 165 is transmitted, and each effect It has various data table storage areas 163b in which processing necessary for displaying an image corresponding to (display) is defined.

  The work RAM 164 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the program ROM 163. The work RAM 164 temporarily stores various data, flags, and the like when the control program stored in the program ROM 163 is executed. The work RAM 164 has, for example, a command storage area 164a and a total reserved number storage area HNX.

  The display-side MPU 162 analyzes various commands received from the audio lamp control device 92 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 165 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 165). To implement.

  The VDP 165 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 80. Since the VDP 165 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 165 should be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating a firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 165 adjusts the timings of the display side MPU 162, the video RAM 167, etc., and intervenes in reading and writing data, and reads out image data from the character ROM 166 at a predetermined timing and stores it in the video RAM 167 in accordance with the image data. The displayed image is displayed on the symbol display device 80.

  The character ROM 166 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80. The character ROM 166 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. Further, the character ROM 166 has a holding image data storage area 166a in which image data to be displayed in the first to eighth holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80 is stored as a part of the data. Is set.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 166 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 166. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 163 is stored in the character ROM 166.

  The video RAM 167 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 80, and the display content of the symbol display device 80 is changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 167.

  The video RAM 167 has a reserved symbol display area 167a, and the reserved symbol display area 167a has a one-to-one correspondence with the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 in the symbol display device 80. Thus, the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 are set. In the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, images corresponding to the data written in the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 are displayed. When data is not set in the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 (when blank data is set), the first corresponding to the first to eighth areas RD1 to RD8. In the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 112>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used in the success / failure lottery and the like.

The main side MPU 112 performs winning lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 71, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 80, and the like using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery, the winning type counter C2 used for determining the winning type, and the reach when the symbol display device 80 fluctuates. Reach random number counter C3 used for generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of winning random number counter C1, and variation type counter CS for determining variation display time in main display unit 71 and symbol display device 80 , An electrical accessory release random number counter C4 used for lottery of whether or not the electrical accessory 63 is in an open state, and a random number initial value counter CINI2 used for setting an initial value of the electrical accessory release random number counter C4. Is used.
A part of each counter is updated at an interval of 4 msec which is an execution interval of a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) described later, and the remaining counters are updated irregularly in a main process (see FIG. 17) described later. The updated values are sequentially stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a of the main RAM 114. And the predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55 is sequentially stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b in the main RAM 114. A predetermined numerical value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a at the timing when the game ball passes the normal symbol start gate 57 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c in the main RAM 114. The counters C1 to C3, CINI1, CS, CINI2, and C4 are provided in various other counter areas 114k of the main RAM 114.

  Here, the configuration of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b and the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 114c will be described.

  The special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b has eight reserved areas of the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8 and one execution area RA9. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a configuration of the first reserved area RA1. The configurations of the second to eighth reserved areas RA2 to RA8 and the execution area RA9 are the same as those in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8 and the execution area RA9 include a winning random number counter storage area 201, a winning type counter storage area 202, a reach random number counter storage area 203, and a winning start opening storage area. 204, a prior notification per flag storage area 205 is provided. In the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number are matched to the winning history of the game balls to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55. Each value of the counter C3 (each value of the lottery counter buffer 114a) is stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201, the hit type counter storage area 202, and the reach random number counter storage area 203, and the first start port 54 or the second Information about which of the start openings 55 is a winning is stored in the winning start opening storage area 204. And when the winning of a game ball is alternately and continuously generated with respect to the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, the first reservation area RA1 → the second reservation area RA2 → the third reservation area RA3 → The numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth reserved area RA4 → the fifth reserved area RA5 → the sixth reserved area RA6 → the seventh reserved area RA7 → the eighth reserved area RA8. As described above, by providing eight holding areas, a total of up to eight game balls winning histories to the first starting port 54 and the second starting port 55 are stored (held). It has become.

  Note that up to four game balls winning histories are stored in the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, respectively. In other words, a maximum of four game balls winning histories for each of the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 are stored, so that a maximum of eight can be stored as a whole. Further, when the number of reserves for the winning start opening is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is not acquired and three prize balls (in this embodiment, three game balls). Only) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the number that can be reserved and stored is described as eight, but the number that can be stored and stored is not limited to eight and is arbitrary, and other numbers such as six, seven, and nine or more are available. It may be a plurality. In addition, the numbers that can be stored in the first start port 54 and the second start port 55 may be different.

  The execution area RA9 is an area for moving each value stored in the first reserved area RA1 when the variable display of the main display unit 71 (the first result display unit 71a or the second result display unit 71b) is started. At the start of one game round, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area R9.

  The pre-notification hit flag storage area 205 is used to perform a pre-notification when it is determined (estimated) that a win result will occur in the game times related to the hold when performing a confirmation process for holding notice (FIGS. 30 and 31) described later. This is the area where the hit flag is stored. The prior notification hit flag storage area 205 may not be provided in the execution area RA9.

  Further, the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b stores a first special symbol reserved number storage area NA for storing the number of held first lottery games (the number of variable display held when winning at the first starting port 54). , Second special symbol hold number storage area NB for storing the number of second lottery games held (the number of variable display hold triggered by winning at the second start opening 55), the total number of variable display held There is provided a total number-of-holds storage area NX.

  The first special symbol reserved number storage area NA is an area for storing the number of game balls that have been won and retained at the first start port 54, and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is the second start port. This is a storage area for storing the number of game balls awarded to 55 and held. The total reserved number storage area NX is a storage area for storing the total number (total reserved number) of the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA and the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB.

  In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c, the value of the electric-equipment release random number counter C4 (the value stored in the lottery counter buffer 114a) is matched to the winning (passing) history of the game ball to the normal symbol start gate 57. Is a reserved area for storing chronologically.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c is composed of four storage areas, an execution area RB5 and a reserved number storage area NC, of first to fourth reservation areas RB1 to RB4. The four storage areas of the first to fourth reservation areas RB1 to RB4 are configured to store (hold storage) a maximum of four game ball winning histories to the normal symbol start gate 57.

  Specifically, when winnings to the normal symbol start gate 57 occur continuously, the electric game object is released in the order of the first holding area RB1 → second holding area RB2 → third holding area RB3 → fourth holding area RB4. The value of the random number counter C4 is stored in time series. By providing four areas in this way, up to four game ball winning histories to the normal symbol start gate 57 are stored.

  The execution area RB5 is an area for moving the numerical value stored in the first reservation area RB1. Then, when performing the open lottery of the electric accessory 63, the determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area RB5.

  In the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 114c, the number that can be reserved is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, five or more. Or may be singular.

  Returning to the description of the counter, the various counters will be specifically described.

  For example, the winning random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 599, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to zero. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and counting starts again from the initial value. The random number initial value counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

  The value of the random number that is won in the winning lottery (win / no lottery) is stored as a special symbol pass / fail table storage area 113a as a pass / fail information group storage means in the main ROM 113 as a special symbol pass / fail table (a pass / fail information group in the grant information). Yes. Here, the contents of the special symbol success / failure table storage area 113a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the special symbol success / failure table in the present embodiment, where (a) shows a special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode, and (b) shows a special symbol success / failure for the high probability mode. Shows the table.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the special symbol success / failure table includes a special symbol success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) for FIG. 15 (a) and a high probability mode for FIG. 15 (b). Special symbol success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in this embodiment, the low probability mode (low probability correspondence state) and the high probability mode (high probability correspondence state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning lottery.

  In the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 15A, a random value ( That is, the winning information) is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the special symbol success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to in the winning lottery, as shown in FIG. 15 (b), the random number value won in the winning lottery (that is, the winning lottery) Information) is 21 pieces. In the present embodiment, the value group (7, 307) of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the winning lottery in the situation of the low probability mode is the winning random number counter that wins the winning lottery in the situation of the high probability mode. It is included in the value group of C1. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55.

  The game result distribution destination for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group in the assigned information) in the distribution table storage area 113b as a distribution information group storage unit in the main ROM 113. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining the distribution table. (A) is a distribution table for the first result display section (first distribution information group), and (b) is for the second result display section. It is a distribution table (2nd distribution information group). The distribution table for the first result display unit is a table that is referred to when the distribution lottery is performed on the hold information acquired based on the winning at the first start port 54. In addition, the distribution table for the second result display unit is a table that is referred to when the distribution lottery is performed on the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second start port 55.

  In the distribution table for the first result display section, as shown in FIG. 16A, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29” as the distribution destination of the game result, “0 to 9 "Corresponds to the 16R probability variation result," 10-23 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation result, and" 24 "corresponds to the 16R rank up (hereinafter referred to as 16RRU) probability variation result. , “25, 26” corresponds to an 8R rank up (hereinafter referred to as 8RRU) probability variation result, and “27 to 29” corresponds to a 4R rank up (hereinafter referred to as 4RRU) probability variation result. .

  On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second result display section, as shown in FIG. 16B, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29” as the distribution destination of the game result, “0 ~ 15 "corresponds to the 16R probability variation result," 16-23 "corresponds to the 4R probability variation result," 24 "corresponds to the 16RRU probability variation result, and" 25, 26 " This corresponds to the 8RRU probability variation result, and “27 to 29” corresponds to the 4RRU probability variation result.

  These game results differ only in the operation mode of the variable winning device 56 in the opening / closing execution mode, and the lottery mode in the winning lottery after the opening / closing mode ends is a high probability mode (probability change mode) Even if the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is any hit result, the mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are switched to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode when the number of games after the opening / closing execution mode reaches the prescribed end number (specifically, 100 times). The mode is limited to the number of times of transition (so-called ST). As will be described later, the high-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is easily opened, and the low-frequency support mode is a mode in which the electric accessory 63 is difficult to open.

  In the control of the variable winning device 56 in the opening / closing execution mode, a round game with an upper limit of a predetermined number of times is executed. Note that a round game has one of the following conditions: a predetermined opening continuation time (opening continuation time) elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls winning a prize winning opening 56a. A game that continues until it is satisfied. In addition, the one-time opening mode of the big prize opening 56a includes a short time mode in which the big prize opening 56a is opened for a short time (specifically 0.06 sec), and a special prize opening 56a for a long time (specifically, 30 sec) a long-time mode of opening is set.

  In the present embodiment, in a situation where the operation handle 31 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 44 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to 10. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of game balls in a single round game is set. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, the time that is shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the maximum number of winning game balls in a single round game, more specifically, the duration that is shorter than the game ball firing cycle is kept open. The time is set. Therefore, when the variable winning device 56 is opened once in a long-time manner, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will occur at the large winning opening 56a. When the variable winning device 56 is opened once in a short time mode, it is expected that no winning will be made to the big winning opening 56a, or even if a winning occurs. .

  Here, the various hit results described with reference to FIG. 16 will be described. The “4R probability change result” is a game result in which the special winning opening 56a is opened four times in a long-time manner. The “16R probability change result” is a game result in which the special winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long-time manner. The “4RRU probability change result” is a game result in which the grand prize opening 56a is opened four times in a long time mode in the first to fourth rounds, and then the grand prize opening 56a is opened 12 times in a short time mode. is there. The “8RRU probability change result” is a game result in which the grand prize opening 56a is opened eight times in a long time mode in the first to eighth rounds, and thereafter, the big winning port 56a is opened eight times in a short time mode. is there. The “16RRU probability change result” is a game result in which the special winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long time manner in the first to the 16th rounds. As a result, in each game result, the control mode of the variable winning device 56 in the opening / closing execution mode is basically any one of the opening mode (opening time) of the large winning opening 56a and the number of opening / closing (round times). Is different. The “16R probability variation result” and “16RRU probability variation result” are both game results in which the grand prize winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long time manner in the first to the 16th rounds. The effects displayed in 80 are set differently. Further, the player can determine which game result is the result of lighting display on the main display unit 71.

  And, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution mode of the game result when winning the winning lottery is the case where winning the winning lottery is triggered by winning the first starting port 54, This is different from the case where the winning at the second start opening 55 is a win for the lottery. Specifically, the probability of winning per 16R probability change with a win at the first start port 54 is lower than the probability of winning per 16R probability change with a win at the second start port 55. The 16R probability variation result can be said to be one of the most advantageous winning results because the special winning opening 56a is opened 16 times in a long-time manner. In other words, the probability that the player can obtain many balls is higher in the case of winning the winning at the second start opening 55.

  In the present embodiment, five types of probability variation winning results are prepared as described above, but a so-called normal winning result in which the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode after the winning result is not prepared.

  Here, the “high probability mode” means a state in which the probability of winning the subsequent winning lottery as an added value after winning is increased, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, the opening / closing execution mode. It is the state of the game which is easy to shift to (privilege game). The high probability mode (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state (high frequency support mode) in which a normal ball hit probability is increased and a game ball is likely to win the first and second start ports 54 and 55. It is a waste. “Low probability mode” refers to a case where the mode is not a high probability mode (when the probability change is not in progress), and means that the probability of winning a winning lottery is normal, that is, a state where the probability of winning a winning lottery is lower than when the probability changes. .

  In addition, as a support mode in the electric accessory 63, when compared with a situation in which game balls are continuously being emitted in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 63 is opened per unit time. A high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode or high frequency guide mode) and a low frequency support mode (low frequency support mode or low frequency guide mode) are set so that the frequency becomes relatively high and low.

  Specifically, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode have different probabilities of winning the electric-powered item opening state in the electric-powered item opening lottery using the electric-powered item opening random number counter C4. There is a higher probability that the mode will be elected in the open state of the electric utility item than in the low frequency support mode. In addition, when the electrified state of the electrified electrical component is won, the high frequency support mode has a higher number of times that the electrified feature 63 is opened when the electrified state of the electrified state is elected than in the low frequency support mode. It is set, and the opening time for one time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric accessory is in an open state and the open state of the electric accessory 63 occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time.

  For this reason, in the high frequency support mode, it becomes easy for a game ball to win the first and second start ports 54 and 55, and a predetermined number of games are won by winning the game balls to the first and second start ports 54 and 55. Since the payout of the ball is executed, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high-frequency support mode is set to the open state of the electric-powered object per unit time as compared with the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above. The probability of winning the electrified state in the lottery may be set equal, and the number of times of opening and the opening time may be set as appropriate, and may be changed as appropriate.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 54 or the second start port 55. Then, it is used to determine whether or not to generate reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the main MPU 112 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state in the present embodiment, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, reach display is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 80. The reach display includes a symbol display device 80 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and in the game times that are the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 56, the stop display result after the variable display. In a game machine in which a special display result is obtained, a change that tends to become a special display result at a stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 80 is started. It is a display state for making a player think that it is in a display state.

  Specifically, the reach display means that a winning occurs by stopping and displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 (open / close execution mode). Is a display state that displays the combination of the main symbols (reach symbols) that may have a winning symbol combination corresponding to the is there.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of main symbols (reach symbols) that may be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed. .

  Specifically, with reference to FIG. 7, in the pachinko machine 10, a state in which the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z <b> 1 and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z <b> 3. , The same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, or the main symbol with the number “3” added to the upper symbol row Z1 and the number “1” to the lower symbol row Z3 of the effective line L2 is stopped and displayed. As a result, a reach line is formed, and in a state where the reach line is formed, the symbol display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop symbol row), thereby achieving reach display. When the open / close execution mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, or “3” and “1”. The whale character shown in FIG. 8 (j) is stopped and displayed on the reach line between the main symbols to which the numbers are attached, and the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is terminated.

  In the reach display, the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, and the change of symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen 80a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS includes a variation display time (display duration) in the main display portion 71 (first result display portion 71a or second result display portion 71b) and a symbol variation display time (display duration time) in the symbol display device 80. ) In the main MPU 112. The variation type counter CS is periodically updated, and a value is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the main display unit 71 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 80. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table (variable display time information group) stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area 113d as the variable display information group storage means in the main ROM 113 is referred to. .

  The electric accessory opening random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the electric accessory opening random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the electric accessory opening random number counter C4, and the count is started again from the initial value. Be started. The random number initial value counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the electric accessory opening random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250). The electric accessory release random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 114c of the main side RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball passes the normal symbol start gate 57.

  The random number value for winning the normal symbol is stored as a normal symbol success / failure table (availability information group) in the normal symbol success / failure table storage area 113f as the success / failure information group storage means in the main ROM 113. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the number of random numbers to be won for the normal symbol is 24 in the low probability mode, and the range is “5 to 28”. In the high probability mode, the range is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the low probability mode, it is determined that the winning is achieved when the value of the acquired electric machine article opening random number counter C4 is in the range of “5-28”, and in the high probability mode, the acquired electric machine object opening random number counter is determined. When the value of C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the winning is made. A predetermined lighting state is indicated on the other display portion 71d in the main display portion 71, and the blades 63a and 63b of the electric accessory 63 are opened.

<Various processes executed by the MPU 112 of the main control board 111>
Next, the main process executed by the main MPU 112 after the main controller 91 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the main process, which is activated by a reset at power-on.

  First, a power-on wait process is executed (S101). In the power-on wait process, a wait process (for example, a peripheral control device such as the audio lamp control device 92, the display control device 93, and the payout control device 100) becomes ready to operate. 1 sec) and waits without proceeding to the next process. After the elapse of the power-on wait process, access to the main RAM 114 is permitted (S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 112 is set (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 103 provided in the power supply and launch control device 101 is manually operated (S104), and when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 103 is not manually operated (S104: NO). Then, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 (S105). If it is determined that the power failure flag of the main RAM 114 is set to “1” (S105: YES), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (S106). It is determined whether or not the checksum stored at the time of blocking matches, that is, whether or not the stored data is normal (S107).

  If it is determined that the checksum is normal (S107: YES), a power-on setting process is executed (S109). In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 114 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and the current gaming state (a state before power-off when the power-off is normal) Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 92 in accordance with the current gaming state. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 124 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 122. Furthermore, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch is turned on (S104: YES), when it is determined that the power failure flag is not set to “1” (S105: NO), or it is determined that the checksum is not normal. In the case (S107: NO), the main-side RAM 114 is cleared as the initialization of the main-side RAM 114 (S108), and then the power-on setting process in step 109 is performed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the game hall is started, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 103 is pressed, the process proceeds to S108. Similarly, when the occurrence information of power shutdown is not set, or when abnormality of data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step 108 in the same manner.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 103 has not been pressed, step 108 is executed without executing step 108, provided that the power failure flag is set to “1” and that the checksum is normal. 109 is executed. In other words, if the power supply is normally shut off and the checksum is normal, a command for returning to the power-off gaming state is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 92.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the following residual process. That is, the main MPU 112 is configured to periodically execute a timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) to be described later, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. This remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the following remaining processes are repeatedly executed using this irregular time. That is, it can be said that the following remaining processes are non-periodic processes executed irregularly.

  In the remaining processing, first, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing (S110). Subsequently, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 is executed (S111), and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed (S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 114, and the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is made to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted (S113). Then, when the process of step 113 is executed, the process returns to step 110, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the processes of step 110 to step 113 are executed.

  Here, as described above, since the random number initial value update process and the variation counter update process are set in the remaining process so as to be sandwiched between the interrupt disable process and the interrupt enable process, the timer interrupt process The timing of starting is always immediately before step 110. Then, after the timer interrupt process is completed, it is only necessary to start from step 110, and the return address after the timer interrupt process is unambiguous. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the current return address at the start of the timer interrupt process, and the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt process is reduced.

  In addition, since timer interrupt processing does not occur during the calculation of predetermined data in the main side MPU 112, the main data stored at that time in the register of the main side MPU 112 at the start of the timer interrupt processing. There is no need to execute save processing to the side RAM 114, and similarly, there is no need to execute data return processing to the register of the main MPU 112 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the processing load at the start of the timer interrupt process is reduced, and the processing load at the end of the timer interrupt process is also reduced.

  In addition, since timer interrupt processing is not started during the update of the random number initial value counters CINI1 and CINI2 or during the update of the variation type counter CS, the timer interrupt processing does not initiate these timer interrupt processing. It is possible to prevent the numerical information of the counter from being acquired and further update processing from being executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main MPU 112 (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.

  First, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 112 will be described. The main control board 111 is provided with a clock circuit (not shown) as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and further, it exists in the middle of the signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 112. A frequency dividing circuit (not shown) is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as a frequency changing unit that changes the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 112. . That is, the pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 112 at intervals of a specific cycle of 4 msec. The main MPU 112 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts the timer interrupt process with at least one condition confirming the occurrence of the specific signal form. And execute.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed when the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 112, the next timer interrupt process may start after 4.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The next timer interrupt process is started after 3.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle of 4 msec regardless of the progress of processing in the main MPU 112, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 112 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, The timer interrupt process at this timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt process at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The above is a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the main MPU 112.

  The main MPU 112 first executes a power failure information storage process (S201). In this power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 117, and when a power outage is identified, a predetermined power outage process is executed.

  Next, a lottery random number update process is executed (S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read out from the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release random number counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step 111 in the main processing (FIG. 17) (S203), and variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step 112 in the main processing (FIG. 17) ( S204). Next, a game stop determination process is executed (S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

  Specifically, various sensors (other detection sensor 115 in FIG. 10) such as a magnet detection sensor, a radio wave detection sensor, and a vibration detection sensor are provided on the front side of the gaming machine main body 12. Then, the main MPU 112 determines whether or not an act of bringing the magnet closer to the game board 43 is performed based on the detection result of the magnet detection sensor by fraud detection processing (S212), which will be described later. Based on the detection result of the sensor, it is determined whether or not an unauthorized radio wave is output toward the pachinko machine 10, and an unauthorized vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the vibration detection sensor. It is determined whether or not there is any. If an affirmative determination is made in any of these fraud determinations, the execution of the process for advancing the game is stopped, assuming that a specific event corresponding to an illegal act on the pachinko machine 10 has occurred.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped (S206), and when it is determined that the progress of the game is stopped (S206: YES), the notification command is output. The process is executed (S207). In the notification command output process, a notification command is set as an output target in a situation where any specific event has occurred and a notification command has not yet been output in response to the occurrence of the specific event.

  Since the notification command includes the content of the specific event that triggered the output, when the voice lamp control device 92 receives the notification command, the notification command corresponding to the content of the specific event is set to be executed. The state in which the progress of the game is stopped and the notification corresponding thereto are started again when the power is turned on only by stopping the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112, and the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 112 is started. By starting the supply of operating power while manually operating the RAM erase switch 103 provided in the power supply and launch control device 101 after the stop, it is prevented from being executed along with the initialization of the main RAM. Become.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the progress of the game is not stopped (S206: NO), the port output process is executed (S208). In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the output process corresponding to the output information is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special winning opening 56a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the electric accessory 63 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 63c is started, and when the information to be switched to the closed state is set. Stops outputting the drive signal. Furthermore, the command set as the output target in each process is output to the sound lamp control device 92 and the payout control device 100.

  Next, a reading process is executed (S209). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Subsequently, it is received from the prize winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a for detecting the winnings to the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55, and the normal symbol starting gate 57. And a winning detection process for specifying whether or not there is a winning at the general winning opening 53, the variable winning device 56, the first starting opening 54, the second starting opening 55 and the normal symbol starting gate 57 (S210). ).

  Thereafter, timer update processing for updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 114 is executed (S211). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is collected and handled. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Subsequently, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (S212). In this fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and if an affirmative decision is made as to whether or not a predetermined event has occurred, an affirmative decision is made at step 205 in the next timer interrupt process. Set for stop. As a result, an affirmative determination is made at step 206. Note that the predetermined event is, as described in step 205, whether or not an act of bringing a magnet close to the game board 43 is performed, and an unauthorized radio wave is not output to the pachinko machine 10. Whether or not an improper vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (S213). In the launch control process, in a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the operation handle 31, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec. Then, based on the information read in the reading process of step 209, input for confirming disconnection of each winning detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a, opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14, etc. A state monitoring process is performed (S214). In this case, in the input state monitoring process, when the disconnection of each winning detection sensor 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, 57a is confirmed, or when the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is confirmed, the notification is made in the same manner as in step 207 above. Execute command output processing. In the process for outputting the notification command, a notification command indicating that the winning detection sensors 53a, 54a, 55a, 56c, and 57a are disconnected or a notification command indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is in an open state is provided. Send. Further, in the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the payout control device 100, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 30 is full, and whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout device 99. If such a determination is made and an affirmative determination is made in these determinations, a corresponding notification command is set as an output target.

  Next, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times (variable display times) and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed (S215), and a normal diagram for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 63. The ordinary power control process is executed (S216). The special map special power control process in step 215 and the general map special power control process in step 216 will be specifically described later.

  Subsequently, on the basis of the processing results of the immediately preceding step 215 and step 216, the increase / decrease number of the hold information (first and second special symbol hold number storage areas NA, NB) for winning to the first and second start ports 55 In addition, display control processing (setting of output information) is performed to reflect the increase / decrease number of the hold information (holding number storage area NC) for the winning to the normal symbol start gate 57 on the main display unit 71 (other display unit 71d). (S217). In addition, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the round display unit 71c reflects the number of times that the variable winning device 56 is opened in the opening / closing execution mode based on a round setting process (FIG. 26, S802) described later. Display control processing (setting of output information) is performed. Further, when the open / close execution mode ends, display control processing (setting of output information) for erasing (extinguishing) the display of the round display unit 71c is performed.

  Next, in a situation where neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed, a demonstration display process is executed for setting the display content of the symbol display device 80 for standby display (S218). The demonstration display process will be specifically described later.

  Then, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout-side MPU 122 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (S219). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (S220).

  Next, the state of the signal output to the external output terminal board 104 is switched so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. External information setting processing is executed (S221).

  After the external process information setting process in step 221 is completed, or after the notification command output process in step 207 is completed, an interrupt end declaration is set (S222). In the main MPU 112, once timer interrupt processing is started, it is stipulated that an interrupt end declaration is set as one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable the timer interrupt processing. Next, interrupt permission is set (S223). In the main MPU 112, once the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt prohibition state is set. Therefore, in step 223, an interrupt permission is set to enable execution of the next timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure special electric control process (S215) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when the winning information to the first starting port 54 or the second starting port 55 is generated, a process for acquiring the holding information is executed and the holding information is stored. A determination for whether or not the hold information is true is made, and further, a process for performing an effect for the game round is executed using the decision as to whether or not the information is appropriate. Further, based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the game has been performed, a process of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for the game is executed, and a process during the opening / closing execution mode and when the opening / closing execution mode ends is executed.

  Specifically, first, hold information acquisition processing is executed (S301). Here, the hold information acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the hold information acquisition process.

  The hold information acquisition process determines whether a game ball has won the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, and if the game ball has won the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, This is a process of storing the acquired counter values in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b up to the upper limit number of reservations (maximum of four for each of the first start port 54 and the second start port 55, and a maximum of eight in total). In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the winning is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b, the determination result of the success / failure, the variation pattern to be selected, etc. are predicted in advance based on each stored counter value. It is processing to do.

  First, it is determined from the detection information of the winning detection sensor 54a whether or not the game ball has won (start winning) at the first starting port 54 (S401). When it is determined that the game ball has won the first start opening 54 (start winning is received) (S401: YES), the value of the number of reservations Na stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage area NA is read out, It is determined whether or not the acquired hold number Na is less than 4 (S402). That is, it is determined whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the number of holds for the first start port 54 (that is, whether the hold number is stored up to the upper limit value).

  If it is determined that the acquired reserved number Na is less than four (S402: YES), the reserved number Na in the first special symbol reserved number storage area NA is incremented by 1 and the total reserved number storage area NX. Is read, and the total holding number Nx is incremented by 1 (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired hold number Na is 4 (S402: NO), the acquisition process of the hold information is terminated as it is.

  After the process of step 403 is completed, numerical information (special information) of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step 202 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the first start Information indicating that the winning to the mouth 54 is triggered is stored in the reserved area corresponding to the total reserved number Nx added by 1 in step 403 in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b (S404).

  Thereafter, the confirmation process for the hold notice, which is a process for causing the voice lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 to recognize that the winning at the first start port 54 has occurred and to execute the hold notice (hold notice). (S405) and hold command setting processing (S406) are executed. The confirmation process for the hold notice in step 405 and the hold command setting process in step 406 will be specifically described later. Thereafter, the process for acquiring the hold information is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first start port 54 (S401: NO), it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 55 (start win). (S407). Then, if it is determined that the game ball has won the second start opening 55 (there is a start win) (S407: YES), processing similar to step 402 to step 406 is performed (S408 to S412). On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the second start opening 55 (S407: NO), the process for acquiring the hold information is terminated.

  In addition, since the process of step 408-step 412 differs only in the process with respect to each process from step 402-step 406 having won the 2nd starting port 55, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, In step 408, the value of the reserved number Nb stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is read and determined. In step 409, the reserved number Nb in the second special symbol reserved number storage area NB is incremented by 1 and the total number is stored. The total number of holds Nx in the number-of-holds storage area NX is incremented by 1. In step 410, information on the numerical values (special information) of the counters C1 to C3 and information indicating that the winning at the second starting port 55 is triggered. In the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b, the total reserved number Nx added by 1 in step 403 is stored in the reserved area.

  The above is the hold information acquisition process. Returning to the description of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 19), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step 301, the special figure special electric counter information is obtained from the special figure special electric counter area 114d provided in the main RAM 114. A reading process is executed (S302). Further, a process for reading the special figure special power address table from the special figure special electric address table storage area 113g of the main ROM 113 is executed (S303), and a start address corresponding to the special figure special electric counter information is acquired from the special figure special electric address table. The process is executed (S304).

  As described above, the special figure special power control process includes a process related to a game-playing effect and a process related to an opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process related to the effect for game times, a special figure change start process (S307) which is a process for starting effects for game times and a process for proceeding effects for game times are processed. A figure changing process (S308) and a special figure finalizing process (S309), which is a process for ending the game-playing effect, are set. In addition, as processing related to the opening / closing execution mode, special electricity start processing (S310) which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and during special electricity opening which is processing for controlling the open state of the special winning opening 56a. Control the process (S311), the special power closing process (S312) which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special winning opening 56a, the ending of the opening / closing execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode Special electric power termination processing (S313), which is a processing for the above, is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  The special figure special power address table will be described with reference to FIG. 21. The special figure special power counter can set numerical information of “0” to “6”, and the special figure special power address table contains the special figure special power counter. Start address information ("SA0" to "SA6") is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each piece of numerical information. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determining process, the start address SA3 is the program start address for executing the special electricity start process, and the start address SA4 is executing the special electricity release process The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closing process, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power end process. .

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 112 to know which process is to be executed as the special figure special power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, an effect for game times is started when no other effect for game times is executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode. In the process related to the production, before starting the production for the game times, it is confirmed whether the flag indicating that the production for the game times is being executed and whether the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. It is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that is set. In addition, during the execution of the game-turn effect, a flag indicating that the flag indicating that the game-turn effect is being executed is set and a confirmation display is set. It is necessary to check whether or not

In addition, the opening / closing execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and another opening / closing execution mode is not executed. In the process, before starting the opening / closing execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the effect for playing the game has ended is set, and a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it is being performed. Further, when the opening is being performed, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that the opening is being performed is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not a flag indicating that the special winning opening 56a is being opened is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not.
Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

  On the other hand, if a special figure special electricity counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for checking the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  In the following, using the special figure special electricity counter and the special figure special electricity address table, the special figure fluctuation start process (S307), the special figure fluctuation process (S308), the special figure confirmation process (S309), and the special electricity start process (S310) ), A special power open process (S311), a special power close process (S312), and a special power end process (S313) will be described.

  First, after obtaining the start address in step 304, a process for setting a zero flag is executed (S305). In the setting process to the zero flag, the numeric information of the special figure special timer counter (16-bit timer counter) is read from the special figure special timer counter area 114e provided in the main RAM 114, and the value of the zero flag is based on the read numeric information. Set. Specifically, when the numerical information of the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, “1” is set to the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “ If it is not “0”, “0” is set to the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112. For example, when the numerical information of the special figure special electricity timer counter is not “0” and the zero flag is “1”, the zero flag is changed from “1” to “0”. The special figure special power timer counter is a counter that is used by the main side MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the special figure special electric power counter according to the passage of time. The timer in step 211 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 18). Subtraction of numerical information is executed in the update process.

  Subsequently, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 304 is executed (S306). Specifically, when the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process (S307), and when the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process (S308). If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure finalizing process (S309). If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process (S310), and the acquired start address is If it is SA4, the process jumps to the special power open process (S311). If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power close process (S312). If the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to special electric power end processing (S313). And when the process of step 307-step 313 is performed, this special figure special electricity control process is complete | finished. Below, each process of step 307-step 313 is demonstrated separately.

  First, the special figure variation start process in step 307 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing. In the special figure variation start process, various determination processes are executed on the condition that the hold information is stored, and a process for starting the game times in which the variable display is performed in the main display unit 71 and the symbol display device 80 is performed. Run.

  First, the value of the total reserved number Nx is read from the total reserved number storage area NX, and it is determined whether or not the acquired reserved number Nx is 1 or more (S501). If it is determined that the total number of holds Nx is 0 (S501: NO), the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of holds Nx is 1 or more (S501: YES), a data setting process is executed (S502).

  In the data setting process, first, a process of subtracting 1 from the total number of holds Nx and shifting data stored in the first hold area RA1 (that is, hold information) to the execution area RA9 is executed. Thereafter, a process of shifting data (that is, holding information) stored in each holding area RA2 to RA8 is executed. That is, this data setting process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to eighth reserved areas RA1 to RA8 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first reserved area RA1 and the second Reserved area RA2 → first reserved area RA1, third reserved area RA3 → second reserved area RA2, fourth reserved area RA4 → third reserved area RA3, fifth reserved area RA5 → fourth reserved area RA4, sixth reserved The data in each area is shifted, such as area RA6 → fifth reserved area RA5, seventh reserved area RA7 → sixth reserved area RA6, eighth reserved area RA8 → seventh reserved area RA7. Further, in this data setting process, a shift time command for causing the voice lamp control device 92 to recognize that the data of the holding areas RA1 to RA8 has been shifted is set as an output target.

  Subsequently, a validity determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S503). In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f provided in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. judge. If it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode, refer to the special symbol success / failure table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15 (b)) stored in the special symbol acceptance table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Among the information stored in the execution area RA9, the information for determining whether or not it is correct, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the hit random number counter storage area 201) is the hit numerical information for the high probability mode. It is determined whether or not they match. If it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode, refer to the special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15 (a)) stored in the special symbol acceptance table storage area 113a of the main ROM 113. Among the information stored in the execution area RA9, the information for determining whether or not, that is, the numerical information on the winning random number counter C1 (the numerical information stored in the winning random number counter storage area 201) is the winning numerical information for the low probability mode. It is determined whether or not they match. The high probability mode flag is stored after the ending time in the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed (FIG. 29, S1202), and is erased when the high probability game number counter becomes 0 (FIG. 24, S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process is a winning / winning result (S504). When it is determined that the winning result is a win (S504: YES), a distribution determination process (special information determination process) is executed (S505). In the allocation determination process, among the information stored in the execution area RA9, information for allocation determination, that is, numerical information related to the winning type counter C2 (numerical information stored in the winning type counter storage area 202), and winning The information of the start opening (information stored in the winning start opening storage area 204) is grasped. Then, referring to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 113b of the main ROM 113, the numerical information regarding the hit type counter C2 ascertained (the numerical information stored in the hit type counter storage area 202). Identify which hit result corresponds to.
Specifically, in the case where the winning to the first starting port 54 is an opportunity, the result of 16R probability variation per unit with reference to the distribution table for the first result display unit (FIG. 16A), A hit result of 4R probability variation, a result of 16RRU probability variation, a result of 8RRU probability variation, or a result of 4RRU probability variation is identified. Further, in the case where the winning at the second starting port 55 is an opportunity, referring to the distribution table for the second result display section (FIG. 16 (b)), the 16R probability variation result, 4R probability variation result As a result, it is specified which one of the results per 16 RRU probability variation, the result per 8 RRU probability variation, and the result per 4 RRU probability variation corresponds to.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for a winning result is executed (S506). Specifically, information on the pattern (lighting state) that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the change is stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. The stop result table for the hit results is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. In the stop result table for winning results, information on the pattern form to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 is set differently for each hit result type.

  Next, a flag storing process corresponding to the distribution determination result is executed (S507). Specifically, the flag is stored in the storage area corresponding to the winning result specified in step 505 among the various winning result flag storage areas 114j of the main RAM 114.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not a winning result (S504: NO), a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed (S508). Specifically, the information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 71 in the game round related to the start of the current change is for the outlier result stored in the stop result table storage area 113e of the main ROM 113. The stop information table is specified, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 114. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the winning result.

  After executing any one of the processes in step 507 and step 508, a grasping process for the variable display time (display duration) is executed (S509). In this process, numerical information of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a reach display occurs in the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current variation is a winning result, it is determined that reach display occurs. Moreover, although it is not any hit result, numerical information regarding the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area RA9 (numerical information stored in the reach random number counter storage area 203) is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach. In this case, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  If it is determined that the reach display is generated, the numerical value information of the current variation type counter CS is corresponded with reference to the reach generation variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113. The obtained variable display time information is acquired. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the reach non-occurrence change display time table stored in the change display time table storage area 113d of the main ROM 113 is referred to, and the current change type counter CS is set. Fluctuating display time information corresponding to numerical information is acquired.

Note that the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation variable display time table. In the present embodiment, the variable display time when no reach occurs is set to be shorter as the total number of holdings Nx is larger. Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the variable display is performed so that the short variable display time is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode is used. The time is set.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that the variable display time does not vary according to the total number of reservations Nx and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the hit results, the case of out-reach, and the case of non-reach out-of-reach (complete out). In this case, the variable display time is allocated according to each game result.

Next, the information on the variable display time acquired in step 509 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter in the special figure special electricity timer counter area 114e (S510). As described above, the update (subtraction) of the numerical information set in the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed in the timer update process (S211) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 18). In addition, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the symbols on the main display unit 71 and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 80 are performed. When these variation displays are ended, In a state in which the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 80, a state in which a predetermined symbol combination is waited on the active line), the symbol is finally displayed (final stop display) over a fixed time (final stop time).
In this case, the variable display time acquired in step 509 is a time obtained by subtracting the fixed time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the variable display time can also be rephrased as a time before confirmation (time before final stop).

  Subsequently, the change command and the type command are set as output targets (S511). Note that the change command includes information on the change display time. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence fluctuation display time table is the fluctuation display time acquired with reference to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Therefore, even if the fluctuation command does not contain information about the occurrence of reach, the audio lamp control device 92, which is the sub-side control device, identifies the presence or absence of reach from the fluctuation display time information. It is possible to do. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. In other words, the type command includes information on 16R probability variation results, 4R probability variation results, 16RRU probability variation results, 8RRU probability variation results, and 4RRU probability variation results information as game result information. Note that the change command and the type command set as the output targets in step 511 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 92 which is the sub-side control device by the port output processing (S208) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 18). Is done.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f as in the above step 504 (S512), and if it is determined that the high probability mode flag is stored. (S512: YES), 1 is subtracted from the high probability game number counter in the high probability game number counter area 114g provided in the main RAM 114 (S513). The high probability game number counter is set to a specified number (100 in this embodiment) after the ending time in the opening / closing execution mode has elapsed (FIG. 29, S1202).

After subtracting 1 from the high-probability game number counter or when it is determined that the high-probability mode flag is not stored (S512: NO), the display of the variation of the pattern on the main display unit 71 is started (S514). The special electric counter of the figure is incremented by 1 (S515). In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the processing of step 515 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric electricity counter is “1”. "
Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure changing process of step 308 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special figure changing process. The special figure changing process is a process after the special figure change start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “1”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the variable display time in the current game round effect has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 ( S601). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “1” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the variation display time in the current game stage effect is It means that it has passed.

  When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (S601: NO), the main display unit 71 repeats a constant light emission pattern at a constant cycle, so the update timing of the main display unit 71 (light emission pattern update) It is determined whether or not (timing) (S602). If it is determined that it is not the update timing (S602: NO), the special figure variation processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the update timing (S602: YES), update content read processing is executed (S603). As for this update content, the update content corresponding to the update timing is read from the update data table storage area 113 i of the main ROM 113.

  Next, an update process for setting the update content read in step 603 for updating the main display unit 71 is executed (S604). The process for actually updating the display content of the main display unit 71 is executed in the display control process (S217) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18). Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (S601: YES), a fixed stop command (final stop display command) is set as an output target (S605). The confirmation stop command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the current game round effect.

  Then, the stop result reading process is executed (S606). In the reading process, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed set in the main RAM 114 in step 506 or step 508 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 22) at the start of the current game round is read. Then, the update process which sets the information of the read pattern aspect for the update of the main display part 71 is performed (S607).

  Subsequently, information on a fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information on the fixed time is set in the special figure special timer counter (S608). Next, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S609). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is “1” when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “2” when the processing of step 609 is executed. " Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure finalizing process at step 309 in the special figure special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process. The special figure finalizing process is a process after the special figure changing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “2”.

  First, by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the current game stage effect has elapsed (S701). ). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “2” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the fixed time in the current game play effect has elapsed Means that When it is determined that the confirmation time has not elapsed (S701: NO), the special figure confirmation in-progress process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the fixed time has elapsed (S701: YES), the determination of whether or not the game has been triggered this time by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage areas 114j in the main RAM 114. It is determined whether or not the result is a hit result (that is, a result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode) (S702). The various hit result flag storage area 114j stores a flag corresponding to the hit result in the flag storing process in step 507 in the special figure change start process (FIG. 22).

  If it is determined that the result is a winning result (S702: YES), the opening command is set as an output target (S703). The opening command is a command for recognizing that the sound lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, starts the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The opening command also includes information on the type of hit result (16R probability change result, 4R probability change result, 16RRU probability change result, 8RRU probability change result, 4RRU probability change result, 4RRU probability change result) that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, information on the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information on the opening time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (S704). Then, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S705). In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”. Therefore, when the processing of step 705 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “3”. " Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result is not a winning result (S702: NO), that is, when the result of the success / failure determination that triggered the current game round is a losing result (that is, a result that does not trigger the opening / closing execution mode). In step S706, it is determined whether the value of the high probability game number counter is 1 or more. If it is determined that the high probability game number counter is 0 (S706: NO), the high probability mode flag is deleted if the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f (S707). ). After erasing the high probability mode flag, or when it is determined that the value of the high probability game number counter is 1 or more (S706: YES), the numerical value information of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (S708). . Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  Next, the special electricity start process of step 310 in the special figure special electricity control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special electricity start process. The special electricity start process is a process after the special figure finalizing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S801). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the opening time in this opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. Means. If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (S801: NO), this special electricity start process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S801: YES), the setting for rounds that sets the number of rounds corresponding to the various winning results in the round counter provided in the other various counter areas 114k of the main RAM 114 Processing is performed (S802). The round counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to specify the number of round games to be executed within the range of one opening / closing execution mode, and one round is consumed in the opening / closing execution mode of the round number regulation mode. Every time “1” is subtracted.

  Here, the round setting process in step 802 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a round setting process.

  First, “10” is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the round game, in a winning counter provided in the other various counter areas 114k of the main RAM 114 (S901). The winning counter is a counter that is decremented by “1” every time a game ball is won into the big winning opening 56a.

  Next, by determining the flags stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114j in the main RAM 114, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the special electricity start process is a 16R probability change hit result. (S902). If it is determined that the result is not the 16R probability variation result (S902: NO), it is determined whether the result is a 16RRU probability variation result (S903). If it is determined that the result is not the 16RRU probability variation result (S903: NO). ), It is determined whether or not the result is an 8RRU probability variation result (S904). If it is determined that the result is not an 8RRU probability variation result (S904: NO), it is determined whether or not the result is a 4RRU probability variation result (S905). .

  When it is determined that the result is a 16R probability variation result (S902: YES), when it is determined that the result is a 16RRU probability variation result (S903: YES), when it is determined that the result is an 8RRU probability variation result (S904: YES), 4RRU probability variation If it is determined that the result is a winning result (S905: YES), “16” is set in the round counter (S906), and the setting process for this round is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not the 4RRU probability variation result (S905: NO), that is, if it is determined that the result is the 4R probability variation result, after setting the round counter to “4” (S907), the setting for this round The process ends.

  Returning to the description of the special electricity start process, after finishing the setting process for the round in step 802, information on the first duration time for opening the special winning opening 56a according to the winning result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode Is read out (S803). In the present embodiment, the first opening duration is all set to a long time mode. Then, the read opening continuation time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (S804).

Next, an opening setting process for opening the special winning opening 56a is executed (S805).
In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register related to the special winning opening 56 a in the main MPU 112. As a result, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is started to switch the special winning opening 56a to the open state.

  Subsequently, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S806). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power start process is executed is “3”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4” when the process of step 806 is executed. Become. Thereafter, the special electricity start process is terminated.

  Next, the special electric power release opening process of step 311 in the special figure special electric power control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special electric release opening process. The special electricity release process is a process after the special electricity start process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “4”.

  First, by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112, it is determined whether or not the open duration in the current round game has elapsed (S1001). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “4” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

  If it is determined that the opening duration has elapsed (S1001: YES), the round counter is decremented by 1 (S1002). Subsequently, the closing time (for example, 1 sec) information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the closing time setting process for setting the closing time information in the special figure special timer counter is performed (S1003). Then, a closing setting process for closing the special winning opening 56a is executed (S1004). In the closing setting process, “0” is set in the register related to the special winning opening 56a in the main MPU 112. Thereby, in the port output process of step 208 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 56d is stopped so as to switch the special winning opening 56a to the closed state.

  Next, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S1005). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is “4”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter when the process of step 1005 is executed is “5”. Become. Thereafter, the special electric power release opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the opening continuation time has not elapsed (S1001: NO), it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the big winning opening 56a based on the detection information from the winning detection sensor 56c (S1006). ), When it is determined that there is no winning at the special winning opening 56a (S1006: NO), the special electric power releasing process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a winning at the big winning opening 56a (S1006: YES), the winning counter is decremented by 1 (S1007). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is “0” (S1008). If it is determined that the winning counter is “0” (S1008: YES), the processing after step 1002 to step 1005 is executed. End the special electricity release process. On the other hand, when it is not “0” (S1008: NO), the special electric power release opening process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the special electricity closing process in step 312 in the special figure special electricity control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special electric power closing process. The special electricity closing process is a process after the special electricity release process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “5”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0” (S1101). If the round counter is not “0” (S1101: NO), whether or not the closing time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 It is determined whether or not (S1102). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the closing time has elapsed. If it is determined that the closing time has not elapsed (S1102: NO), the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing time has elapsed (S1102: YES), “10” is set to the winning counter (S1103). Subsequently, a reading process of the opening continuation time is executed (S1104). Specifically, by determining the flag stored in the various hit result flag storage area 114j, the result that has caused the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is specified, and the value of the round counter is read out, based on these The information on the duration for which the special winning opening 56a is opened is read out. In this pachinko machine 10, the 4RRU accuracy variation result is the open duration corresponding to the short-time mode from the 5th R (round counter = 12), and the 8RRU probability variation result is the 9R-th (round counter = 8) from the short-time mode. The duration is set to be the corresponding opening duration. In addition, the 16R probability variation result and the 16RRU probability variation result are set so as to have an open duration corresponding to the long-time mode in all rounds. Then, the information of the read opening duration is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (S1105).

  Subsequently, an opening setting process is executed (S1106). The processing content of the opening setting process is the same as the opening setting process of step 805 in the special electricity start process (FIG. 25). Next, the special figure special electricity counter is decremented by 1 (S1107). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is “5”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4” when the process of step 1107 is executed. It becomes. Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the round counter is “0” (S1101: YES), the ending command is set as an output target (S1108). The ending command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 92, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the effect for ending. The ending command also includes information on the type of hit result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, the information of the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read, and the information of the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter (S1109). Subsequently, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter (S1110). In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure closing process is executed is “5”, when the processing of step 2010 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “6”. " Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  Next, the special electric power end process in step 313 in the special graphic special electric control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the special electricity ending process. The special electric power end process is a process after the special electric power closing process, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “6”.

  First, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1201). That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 19), in step 305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “6” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S1201: NO), the special electric power termination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S1201: YES), a game state transition process is executed (S1202). In the gaming state transition process, the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area 114f of the main RAM 114, and “100” is set in the high probability game number counter in the high probability game number counter area 114g of the main RAM 114. To do. In the present embodiment, all winning results are probable winning results, and after the ending, all shift to the high probability mode. Further, in the processing of step 1202, a flag indicating information corresponding to the type of winning result is deleted from the various winning result flag storage areas 114j. Then, the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (S1203). Thereafter, the special electricity ending process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special figure special power control process is executed using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter.
For this reason, when the main MPU 112 identifies which situation is in a series of game flows composed of a game-playing effect and an opening / closing execution mode, a special figure special electric power counter may be referred to. Thus, there is no need to check a plurality of flags at each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Further, in each process of step 307 to step 313, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, the process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for making a transition to the next situation after a certain situation is completed, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

  In addition, “0”, which is the initial value of the special figure special electricity counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of gaming situations composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, even after the initialization of the main RAM 114, etc., it is possible to be the first situation in the series of gaming situations without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter.

  In addition, when updating the special figure special electricity counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

  In addition, the process for acquiring the hold information that can occur in any of the above-described series of game situations is set separately from the processes in Steps 307 to 313. Refer to the special figure special electricity counter. Are not included in each process executed. Thereby, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the setting of the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter occurs at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information is simplified.

  Of the processes in steps 307 to 313, in the process in which the period is measured in order to determine the end condition of the corresponding situation, the period of the period is determined by using a common period measuring unit called a special figure special electricity timer counter. Measurement is performed. Thereby, the storage capacity of the main RAM 114 can be reduced. In addition, since the situation corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter does not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is simultaneously referred to in a plurality of situations. In other words, the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

  Further, the process of updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed by a timer update process (S211 in FIG. 18) set as a process different from the steps 307 to 313. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is individually set for each processing of Step 307 to Step 313.

Further, whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” is confirmed collectively at step 305 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 19), and in each process of step 308 to step 313, The passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 112.
Thereby, in each process of step 308 to step 313, compared with the case where the numerical information is read from the special figure special electricity timer counter of the main RAM 114 and it is determined whether or not the numerical information is “0”. The processing configuration can be simplified.

  Here, the special power special figure counter is also referred to in order to confirm which state is in a series of games composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode in processes other than the special figure special electric control processing. The For example, in the demonstration display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18), the special electricity special figure counter is referred to, and the demonstration display process will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a confirmation process for holding advance notice triggered by winning at the first starting port 54 executed in step 405 of the holding information acquisition process (FIG. 20) will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice triggered by winning at the first start port 54.

  First, the total reserved number Nx stored in the total reserved number storage area NX of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 114b is read, and the total reserved number Nx is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1301). Then, based on the current winning at the first starting port 54, the information for hit determination out of the hold information acquired in step 404 in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 20), that is, updated by the hit random number counter C1. Information is grasped (S1302).

  Next, it is determined (estimated) whether or not the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode when the game times related to the hold are started (S1303). Specifically, in this embodiment, since the number of high probability games is 100, first, the total number of held Nx stored in the register in step 1301 is compared with the value of the high probability game number counter, If the value of the high probability game number counter is larger (if the game time triggered by the suspension is in the high probability mode), it is determined that the high probability mode is set. If the value of the high-probability game number counter is smaller, the previous notification per-flag storage area 205 (see FIG. 14) in the reserved area numbered below the reserved area corresponding to the total reserved number Nx read in step 1301. ) Is determined whether or not a flag for prior notification is stored. If the flag for prior notification is stored, it is determined that the high probability mode is set.

  When it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode (S1303: YES), referring to the special symbol success / failure table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. It is determined (estimated) whether it is included in the information set as the winning combination (S1304). On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode (S1303: NO), that is, when the mode is the high probability mode, the special symbol success / failure table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. It is determined (estimated) whether or not the information for determining the winning is included in the information set as the winning combination (S1305).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information for winning determination acquired in step 1302 corresponds to winning winning (S1306). If it is determined that the winning combination is supported (S1306: YES), the previous notification hit flag is stored in the previous notification hit flag storage area 205 of the holding area where each numerical value is stored in step 404 (S1307). And the information acquired from the information for classification determination among the hold information acquired in step 404 based on the winning to the first starting port 54, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the winning type counter C2 is grasped (S1308). .

  Next, referring to the distribution table for the first result display unit shown in FIG. 16A (S1309), the information for determining the hit type obtained in step 1308 is set as the 16R probability variation result. Specify which of the information set as the result of 4R probability variation, the information set as the result of 16RRU probability variation, the information set as the result of 8RRU probability variation, or the information set as the result of 4RRU probability variation ( And various hit result information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1310).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning determination information acquired in step 1302 does not correspond to the winning winning (S1306: NO), outreach information in the hold information acquired in step 404, That is, the information acquired from the information updated by the reach random number counter C3 is grasped (S1311).

  Then, with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach table storage area 113c of the main ROM 113 (S1312), the reach determination information grasped in step 1311 is included in the information set as the occurrence of reach. It is determined (estimated) whether it has been (S1313). If it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of reach (S1313: YES), after the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1314), the confirmation process for the reservation notice is terminated. Further, if it is determined that the generation of the reach is not supported (S1313: NO), the confirmation process for the previous notice is ended as it is.

  Next, a description will be given of the confirmation process for the advance notice triggered by the winning at the second start opening 55 executed in step 411 of the on hold information acquisition process (FIG. 20). FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for holding notice triggered by winning at the second starting port 54.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the confirmation process for holding notice (S1401 to S1414) triggered by winning at the second starting port 55 is triggered by winning at the first starting port 54 described in FIG. This is basically the same as the confirmation process for the hold notice. As a difference from the confirmation process for holding advance notice triggered by winning at the first starting port 54, when it is determined that the information for determining the winning hit corresponds to winning (S1406: YES), Referring to the distribution table for the second result display section shown in FIG. 16B (S1409), it is specified which hit information contains the information for determining the hit type grasped in step 1408 ( Only the processing to be estimated) (S1410). For this reason, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a hold command setting process triggered by winning at the first start port 54, which is executed in step 406 in the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 20), will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a hold command setting process.

  First, it is determined whether or not any of 16R probability variation result information, 4R probability variation result information, 16RRU probability variation result information, 8RRU probability variation result information, and 4RRU probability variation result information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112. (S1501). If it is determined that any hit information is stored (S1501: YES), a hit correspondence pending command corresponding to various hit results is set as an output target (S1502).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the various hit result information is not stored (S1501: NO), it is determined whether reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 (S1503). If it is determined that the reach occurrence information is stored (S1503: YES), the detach reach hold command is set as an output target (S1504). If it is determined that the reach occurrence information is not stored (S1503: NO), the other corresponding hold command is set as an output target (S1505). Then, after executing any one of the processing of step 1502, step 1504, and step 1505, the setting processing of the pending command is terminated.

  Note that the hold command setting process triggered by winning at the second start opening 55 executed in step 412 of the hold information acquisition process (FIG. 20) is a hold based on winning at the first start opening 54. Since this is the same as the command setting process, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the general power control process executed in step 216 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the ordinary power transmission control process.

  In the ordinary figure / electric power control process, when a winning to the ordinary symbol start gate 57 occurs, a process for obtaining the ordinary symbol hold information is executed and the ordinary symbol hold information is stored. Then, the holding information is subjected to the opening determination of the electric accessory 63, and further, the opening determination is used as a trigger to perform the process for performing the effect for the normal symbol. Moreover, the process which opens and closes the electrically-driven accessory 63 is performed based on the result of open determination.

  Specifically, first, a process for acquiring normal symbol hold information is executed (S1701). In the acquisition process, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start gate 57, the numerical value information of the electric accessory release random number counter C4 (that is, the normal symbol hold information) is stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 114c. Execute the process. In addition, acquisition of the holding information of the normal symbol is performed within the range of the upper limit value of holding (four in this embodiment).

  Next, a process of reading information on the general-purpose power counter from the general-purpose power counter area 114h of the main RAM 114 is executed (S1702), and the general-purpose power address table storage area 113h of the main-side ROM 113 is read. A process of reading information in the address table is executed (S1703). And the process which acquires the start address corresponding to the information of a general-purpose / electric power counter from a general-purpose / electric power address table is performed (S1704).

  The processing contents of steps 1702 to 1704 will be described. As described above, the ordinary map / electric power control process includes a process related to the effect for the ordinary map and a process related to the opening / closing of the electric accessory 63. In this case, as a process related to the effect for the normal map, a normal map change start process, a normal map change process, and a normal map determining process are set. In addition, as a process related to the opening / closing of the electric accessory 63, a process for opening the normal power and a process for closing the normal power are set.

  In such a processing configuration, the ordinary power transmission counter is a counter for the main MPU 112 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Is set with a start address in a program for executing the above-described plural types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the ordinary power counter.

  Referring to FIG. 34, the multi-purpose special power counter can set numerical information of “0” to “4”. Start address information ("NSA0" to "NSA4") is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each piece of numerical information of the electric counter. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change start process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change change process, and the start address NSA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the processing during normalization, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the processing during open power, and the start address NSA4 is closed This is the start address of the program for executing the process.

  When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished, the general-purpose public power counter is triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied. One addition, one subtraction, or “0” is cleared corresponding to the processing executed in the electric control processing. Therefore, in the ordinary power / general power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the common power / electric power counter.

  According to the above configuration, as in the case of the special figure special power control, the main MPU 112 can determine which process is to be executed as the ordinary power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  The following is the process for starting the normal map change, the normal map change process, the general map finalizing process, the general power open process, and the general power shut-off process using the general map / general counter and the general map / general address table. A processing configuration for execution will be described.

  After executing the processing of step 1704, the normal symbol zero flag setting processing is executed (S1705). In the normal symbol zero flag setting process, the main MPU 112 is read when the numerical information of the general-purpose power counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read and the numerical information of the general-purpose power counter is “0”. The process of setting “1” to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of is executed. In other words, when the numerical information of the special figure special timer counter is not “0”, a process of setting “0” (erasing “1”) to the zero flag of the normal symbol provided in the register of the main MPU 112 is performed. Run. The special-purpose special power timer counter is a counter that is used by the main MPU 112 to specify the update timing of the special-purpose special electricity counter according to the passage of time. The timer update process (see FIG. 18) Subtraction of numerical information is executed in S211).

  Next, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step 1704 is executed (S1706). Specifically, when the acquired start address is NSA0, the process jumps to the common map change start process (S1707), and when the acquired start address is NSA1, the process jumps to the normal map change process (S1708). If the acquired start address is NSA2, the process jumps to the process for determining the usual figure (S1709), and if the acquired start address is NSA3, the process jumps to the process for releasing the general call (S1710). If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the normal power-off process (S1711).

  In the normal symbol change start process (S1707), on the condition that the normal symbol hold information is stored, the normal symbol hold information is used to determine the opening of the electric accessory 63 and the main display unit 71. In the other display section 71d, a process for starting the display of the variation of the pattern (flashing display) is executed. In this case, when the variable display time information for displaying the pattern on the other display unit 71d is set in the general-purpose power counter, and the variable display on the other display unit 71d is started, The electric counter is updated from “0” to “1”.

  In the normal map changing process (S1708), a process for updating the display on the other display unit 71d is executed. In this case, on the condition that the change display time has been confirmed, the fixed time information is set in the normal-use normal power timer counter, and the normal-use normal power counter is updated from “1” to “2”.

  In the process of determining a normal figure (S1709), a process for displaying the result of the current release determination on the other display unit 71d for the normal symbol determination time is executed and the result of the release determination is a winning result. The process for setting the number of times of opening in the case of opening the electric combination 63 when the electric combination 63 is opened using the current winning result as a trigger is executed. In this case, on the condition that the regular symbol confirmation time has passed and the result of the release determination is the winning result, the information on the current release duration time of the electric accessory 63 is displayed as the general-purpose power timer counter. In addition, the electric accessory 63 is opened, and the ordinary power counter is updated from “2” to “3”. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the fixed time of the normal symbol has elapsed but the result of the release determination is not the winning result, the setting for setting the electric accessory 63 to the open state is not performed, and the normal-purpose power counter is set to “ The process of clearing “0” is executed.

  In the process of opening the electric train (S1710), the process for keeping the electric accessory 63 in the closed state is performed when the open state of the electric accessory 63 is maintained and the closing timing is reached. In this case, on the condition that the opening duration of the electric accessory 63 has been confirmed, the information on the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 is set in the normal power timer counter and the electric accessory 63 is closed. In addition, the normal power counter is updated from “3” to “4”.

  In the process of closing the electric train (S1711), when it is necessary to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 63 and to make the electric accessory 63 open again, the processing for making the electric accessory 63 open. Execute. In this case, on the condition that it is confirmed that the closing duration of the electric accessory 63 has elapsed and that it is necessary to open again, information on the current opening duration in the electric accessory 63 is obtained. At the same time, the electric power supply 63 is set in an open state, and the general electric power counter is updated from “4” to “3”. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the electric appliance 63 has been closed for a while, but it is not necessary to open the electric accessory 63 again, the setting for making the electric accessory 63 open is not performed. The process of clearing the figure ordinary power counter to “0” is executed.

  If any one of steps 1707 to 1711 is executed, the ordinary power transmission control process is terminated.

  As described above, the general map power control process is executed using the general map general power counter, the general map general power address table, and the general map general power timer counter. When the main MPU 112 identifies the situation in a series of game flows composed of the opening and closing of the object 63, it is sufficient to refer to the general power counter, and a plurality of flags are set as in the past. There is no need to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In addition, when updating the ordinary power counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. In addition, since the normal symbol zero flag is used in the same manner as the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control process, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Next, the demonstration display process executed in step 218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the display process for demonstration.

  First, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electricity counter is "0" (S1801). The case where the special figure special electricity counter is “0” means that the game round effect has not been executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence / absence of a flag that a game-playing effect is being executed as in the prior art, and the presence / absence of a flag is confirmed by the presence / absence of a flag. It is necessary to read the flag information from the main RAM 114 and check the information, and then read the other flag information from the main RAM 114 to check the information. Then, it is necessary to perform address designation to the main RAM 114 at least twice, and to perform data setting processing for the register when data is transferred to the main RAM 114 at least twice. On the other hand, by using the special figure special power counter, the address designation to the main RAM 114 is only once, and further, the data setting processing to the register when data is transferred is only once. . Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  If it is determined that the special figure special power counter is not "0" (S1801: NO), the demonstration display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the special figure special power counter is "0" (S1801). : YES), it is determined whether or not it is in a demonstration display state (S1802).

  The demonstration display state means a state in which a demonstration display (that is, a standby display) has already been performed on the symbol display device 80, and the demonstration display flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114m of the main RAM 114. It is a state of being. Also, the demonstration display is a predetermined demonstration display waiting time (for example, after the ending time of the previous opening / closing execution mode has been completed after the final time has elapsed after displaying the result of stopping the previous game times) , 0.1 sec), an image of a start waiting effect is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, and an effect corresponding to that is performed by the illumination unit 33 and the speaker unit 34. Say.

  In the demonstration display in the symbol display device 80, an image in which the symbol displayed on the active line performs a predetermined operation is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the symbol is a predetermined symbol. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying an image in operation.

  If it is determined that it is in the demo display state (S1802: YES), the present demo display process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not in the demo display state (S1802: NO), it is in a demo display waiting state. It is determined whether or not (S1803). The demonstration display waiting state means a state in which measurement of the demonstration display waiting time has already been started, and is a state in which a demonstration display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage areas 114m of the main RAM 114. is there.

  If it is determined that the display is not in the demo display waiting state (S1803: N0), the demo display waiting time information stored in advance in the main ROM 113 is read out, and the demo display waiting time information is used as the special figure special timer counter. (S1804). Subsequently, a demonstration display waiting flag is stored in the other various flag storage area 114m of the main RAM 114 to set a demonstration display waiting state (S1805). Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the display is waiting for the demonstration display (S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” (S1806). If it is determined that the special figure special electricity timer counter is not "0" (S1806: NO), the demonstration display process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined that the special figure special electric timer counter is “0” (S1806: YES), the demo display flag is stored in the other various flag storage area 114m of the main RAM 114 to set the demo display state (S1807). ). In step 1807, the demo display wait flag is deleted to cancel the demo display wait state. The demonstration display state is canceled when the demonstration display flag is erased when an effect for game times is newly started. Next, a demonstration start command is set as an output target (S1808). Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

<Direction and notification execution control>
Next, production control and notification execution control using various output devices executed by the audio side MPU 152 and the display side MPU 162 will be described.

  First, timer interrupt processing executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at 4 msec, for example.

  In the timer interrupt processing, first, main-side command storage processing is executed (S1901). The main-side command storage process is a process for storing a command in the command storage area 154a of the voice-side RAM 154 when a command is received from the main-side MPU 112. The command storage area 154a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are stored in the command storage area 154a. Processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

  Next, a main-side command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main-side MPU 112 is executed (S1902). This main-side command handling process will be specifically described later. Subsequently, a second frame button corresponding process is executed (S1903). In this second frame button handling process, when the second frame button 27 is operated by the player on condition that a demonstration start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game turn or opening / closing execution mode). Then, the volume and the amount of light corresponding to the operation are set for updating. Whether or not the second frame button 27 has been operated is determined by a signal from a detection sensor that monitors the operation of the second frame button 27.

  Then, while performing the light emission control process for performing light emission control of the various light emission parts including the electrical decoration part 33 (S1904), the audio | voice control process for performing the audio | voice control of the speaker part 34 is performed (S1905). In the light emission control process and the sound control process, when information is set for update in step 1903, the process is executed based on the information. Subsequently, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S1906).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the operation of the first frame button 26 is in an effective operation period (S1907). In the present embodiment, an operation effective period in which the operation of the first frame button 26 is valid may occur in a situation where an effect of one unit such as a game turn effect is being executed. In this case, when the first frame button 26 is operated during the operation valid period, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80 may be switched. On the other hand, if the first frame button 26 is operated outside the operation valid period, the reserved symbols are not replaced, but the background stage (underwater mode, sand beach mode, and city mode) displayed on the symbol display device 80 is not changed. The display is changed and displayed, or the chance effect effect of the reach effect displayed on the symbol display device 80 or the effect of the notice character is displayed. Therefore, in this step 1907, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid. As will be described in detail later, the voice-side MPU 152 performs an operation valid lottery process (S2007) in the main-side command handling process (S1902), and if the operation valid lottery is won, the voice-side RAM 154 operation valid flag The operation valid flag is stored in the storage area 154c (FIG. 42, S2407). For this reason, it is determined whether or not the operation is valid by determining whether or not the operation valid flag is stored.

  If it is determined that the operation is valid (S1907: YES), it is determined whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated (S1908). Whether or not the first frame button 26 has been operated is determined by a signal from a detection sensor that monitors the operation of the first frame button 26.

  When it is determined that the first frame button 26 is not operated (S1908: NO), it is determined whether or not the operation valid timer counter is 0 (S1909). More specifically, as will be described later, when an operation valid lottery in the main command handling process (S1902) is won, an operation valid flag is stored and information on a predetermined time is set in the operation valid timer counter ( FIG. 42, S2408). For this reason, it is determined whether or not the operation effective timer counter is 0 by reading the numerical information of the operation effective timer counter. If it is determined that the operation effective timer counter is not 0 (S1909: NO), it remains as it is. This timer interrupt process ends. If the first frame button 26 is operated (S1908: YES), the replacement process is executed immediately (S1910). Although the replacement process will be specifically described later, when the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) is won, the held symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80 are switched, so the player switches the held symbols based on his / her own operation. You can recognize that Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the first frame button is not operated, when it is determined that the operation valid timer counter is 0 (S1909: YES), after executing the replacement process (S1910), Timer interrupt processing ends. As a result, as in the case where the first frame button is operated, when the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503) is won, the reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display device 80 are switched, so that the effects of the production can be matched. it can.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation is not valid (S1907: NO), the first frame button handling process is executed (S1911), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In this first frame button handling process, if a demo start command is received from the main MPU 112 (not in the game play or opening / closing execution mode), or if one game play is being processed, the game A first frame button operation command indicating that the first frame button 26 has been operated is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 on the condition that the variable display is repeated until a predetermined period before it stops.

  Next, the main-side command handling process in the timer interrupt process of the voice-side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing main-side command response processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not a variation command and a type command are received from the main MPU 112 (S2001). If it is determined that these commands are received (S2001: YES), a game result storage process is performed. Is executed (S2002). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the lottery determination or distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 112 at the start of the current game round, that is, the current game Information about which hit result is the game result of the game is specified, and a process of writing the specified information in the retained data area 154f provided in the voice side RAM 154 is executed. As described above, the retained data area 154f is data temporarily used to execute the effects during the game rotation and the opening / closing execution mode, and notification, and after the effects and notifications are started, Is also an area for storing and holding data that can be independently used by the voice-side MPU 152.

  Next, a notice lottery process is executed (S2003). In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 80 in the current game round. As described above, as the notice display, as already described, in the situation where the symbol display is variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started in the symbol display device 80, or a part of the symbol display. In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol sequences, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and a background screen as a previous mode Includes a different predetermined mode, and a pattern on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. The notice display may occur at any game time when reach display is performed or when reach display is not performed. However, when reach display is performed, it is higher than when reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Also, in the notice lottery process, the game times corresponding to any of the winning results are more likely to generate a notice display and more likely to generate a notice display having a lower appearance rate than the game times corresponding to the missed result. A lottery will be conducted.

  Next, stop symbol determination processing is executed (S2004). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a 16R probability change result and a 4R probability change result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is displayed. It is determined as information on the result of this stop. In this case, the same symbol type and effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, odd symbols are easily selected as symbols forming the same symbol combination. Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a 16 RRU probability variation result, an 8 RRU probability variation result, or a 4 RRU probability variation result, the number “3” is displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 in the active line L2. The main symbol attached, the main symbol with the number “1” attached to the lower symbol row Z3, and the information corresponding to the stop result that becomes the whale character symbol shown in FIG. It is determined as information on the result of stopping.

  Then, the process for determining the production pattern of this game time is performed (S2005). In this processing, information on the variation display time of the game times is specified from the contents of the variation command and the type command received this time, information on the variation display time, information on the game result identified in step 2002, And the effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the lottery result of the notice lottery process in the step 2003 is selected.

  Next, a process of writing the type of stop symbol determined in step 2004 and the type of effect pattern selected in step 2005 to the retained data area 154f of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S2006). Since the production pattern includes information on the variable display time of the current game time, by writing the production pattern information in the holding data area 154f, not only the production pattern information but also the variable display time information. Also, the audio side MPU 152 can read again.

  Next, an operation effective lottery process is performed (S2007). This operation valid lottery process will be described in detail later, but whether or not to generate an operation notification for causing the player to operate the first frame button 26 based on the information in the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of the voice side RAM 154. Do the lottery.

Subsequently, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step 2004 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step 2005 are transmitted to the display side MPU 162.
Further, when winning in the operation effective lottery process in step 2007, an operation notification command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2008). The processing contents of the display-side MPU 162 upon receiving these commands will be described later. When the display-side MPU 162 receives the operation notification command, the display-side MPU 162 displays an “on hold display symbol when the button is pressed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80. It may be replaced !? "is displayed to inform the player that the operation of the first frame button 26 is effective (see Fig. 47). The period during which this display is performed is during the operation effective period of step 1907 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 36) of the audio side MPU 152.

  It should be noted that the operation notification time during which the symbol display device 80 displays “If the button is pressed, the held symbols may be replaced !?” is fixed, and in this embodiment, it is 3 sec, which is shorter than all the variable display periods. ing. However, the operation notification time of “the hold symbol may be changed when the button is pressed!” On the symbol display device 80 is not limited to this, and may be changed according to the total number of holds Nx and the game state. Good. For example, in the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display time when no reach occurs is set to be shorter as the total number of holdings Nx is larger, and the frequency is low in the high frequency support mode. It is set shorter than the situation in the support mode. For this reason, the operation notification time may be set to be shorter as the total number of held Nx is larger, and to be shorter in the situation of the high frequency support mode than in the situation of the low frequency support mode.

  Next, a game number update process is executed (S2009). In this update process, a process for updating the game number counter is executed so that the number of digest games counted in the game number counter provided in the other various counter areas 154h of the voice side RAM 154 is incremented by one. The number of times of digestion game is the number of game times that have been digested without re-entering the opening / closing execution mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The audio side MPU 152 can use the information on the number of digestion games when determining the contents of the production. For example, if the number of digestion games is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a predetermined notice display is easily selected in the notice lottery process. Execute the following process.

  When it is determined that the change command and the type command have not been received (S2001: NO), or after the game number update process has been executed, it is determined whether a fixed stop (final stop display) command has been received. (S2010). And when it determines with having received the fixed stop command (S2010: YES), a symbol stop command is transmitted to the display side MPU162 (S2011). The symbol stop command is a command for instructing the display side MPU 162 to wait for the stop symbol corresponding to the current game time on the effective lines L1 to L5 and maintain the state for the fixed stop time.

  When it is determined that the fixed stop command has not been received (S2010: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the symbol stop command, it is determined whether a hold command has been received (S2012). Is determined to be received (S2012: YES), a pending command handling process is executed (S2013).

  Here, the pending command handling process in step 2013 of the main command handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the pending command handling process.

  First, before explaining the hold command response processing, the configuration of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b provided in the voice side RAM 154 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

  The slave special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b follows the special symbol reserve ball storage area 114b of the main RAM 114, and includes slave first to slave eighth reserve areas RC1 to RC8. Then, the slave first to slave eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8 are a winning notification winning flag storage area 211, a winning notification non-winning flag storage area 212, a miss notification winning flag storage area 213, a miss notification non-winning flag storage area 214, A replacement flag storage area 215 is provided. The winning notification winning flag storage area 211 is an area in which the received hold command includes hit result information, and a winning notification winning flag is stored when a winning notification lottery described later is won. The winning notification non-winning flag storage area 212 includes the hit result information in the received hold command, and is an area in which a winning notification non-winning flag is stored when the holding notification lottery described later is not won. The outage notification winning flag storage area 213 includes an outage result information included in the received hold command, and is an area in which the outage notification winning flag is stored when a hold notification lottery described later is won. The outage notification non-winning flag storage area 214 is an area in which the received hold command includes outage result information and stores a outage notification non-winning flag when the hold notification lottery described later is not won. The replacement flag storage area 215 is an area in which a replacement flag is stored when a lottery to be described later is won.

  In the following description, the sub-holding area is also referred to as sub-holding area RC #, where # indicates a corresponding character among the numbers 1-8. That is, when it shows with subordinate reservation area RC #, it means that the applicable thing is shown among subordinate 1st-subordinate 8th reservation area RC1-RC8.

  Further, the slave special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b is provided with a slave total hold number storage area INX for storing the total number of holds stored in the slave first to slave eighth reserve areas RC1 to RC8. . The above is the configuration of the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b in the present embodiment.

  In the hold command handling process, first, 1 is added to the total hold number INx of the total hold number storage area INX of the sub special symbol hold ball storage area 154b (S2201). Next, whether or not the pending command received this time corresponds to one of the following results: 16R probability variation result, 4R probability variation result, 16RRU probability variation result, 8RRU probability variation result, 4RRU probability variation result, or 4RRU probability variation result It is determined whether or not (S2202).

If it is determined that the command is a hit corresponding hold command (S2202: YES), a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a hold notification symbol (“●”) in the hold symbol display area Ds * of the symbol display device 80 is performed. The first hold notification lottery process is executed (S2203). In the first hold notification lottery process, first, the value of the hold notification lottery counter is read from the hold notification lottery counter area 154e provided in the voice-side RAM 154. Here, the pending notification lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured to add 1 at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and reaches the maximum value. The configuration is initialized to 0 later. In the first hold notification lottery process, the value of the read hold notification lottery counter is notified with reference to the hit hold notification lottery table stored in the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b of the voice ROM 153. Judge whether it corresponds to winning.
Although the probability of being on hold notification winning is arbitrary, in this pachinko machine 10, the on hold notification lottery table is set so that the notification winning is achieved with a probability of 1/10.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the first hold notification lottery process is notification winning (S2204). When it is determined that the hold notification winning is made (S2204: YES), the notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice MPU 152 (S2205). On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification is not on hold notification (S2204: NO), the winning notification non-winning information is stored (S2206).

  If it is determined that the command is not a hit hold command (S2202: NO), that is, if it is determined that the command is a miss reach correspondence hold command or other correspondence hold command, a pseudo hold notification lottery process (S2207) is performed.

  Here, the pseudo hold notification lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the pseudo hold notification lottery process. In the pseudo-pending notification lottery process, basically the same processes as in steps 2202 to 2206 are performed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the hold command is a release reach support hold command (S2301). If it is determined that the hold command is a release reach-supported hold command (S2301: YES), a second hold notification lottery process is executed (S2302), and it is determined that the hold command is not a release reach support hold command (S2301). : NO), that is, when it is determined that the hold command is another corresponding hold command (when it is determined that the hold command is completely out of reach), the third hold notification lottery process is executed (S2303).
In the second and third hold notification lottery processes, first, the value of the hold notification lottery counter is read from the hold notification lottery counter area 154e provided in the voice side RAM 154. In the present embodiment, in Step 2302 and Step 2303, values are read from the same counter. Then, in the second hold notification lottery process, the value of the read hold notification lottery counter is read with reference to the release reach hold notification lottery table stored in the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b of the voice ROM 153. It is determined whether or not the notification winning is supported. The probability of winning the notification is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the reach hold notification lottery table is set so that the notification winning is achieved with a probability of 1/5. On the other hand, in the third hold notification lottery process, the value of the read hold notification lottery counter is read with reference to the complete outage hold notification lottery table stored in the hold notification lottery table storage area 153b of the voice ROM 153. It is determined whether or not the notification winning is supported. The probability of being informed notification is arbitrary, but in this pachinko machine 10, a complete outage notification notifying lottery table is set so as to be notified in 1/100 probability. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the probability that the reach correspondence hold is a notification win is higher than the complete release correspondence hold (complete release hold that does not result in a reach).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the second and third hold notification lottery processing is a hold notification winning (S2304). If it is determined that the hold notification winning is selected (S2304: YES), the notification notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice MPU 152 (S2305), and the pseudo hold notification lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification is not on hold notification (S2304: NO), the notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the voice MPU 152 (S2306), and the pseudo hold notification lottery process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the information stored in step 2205, step 2206, step 2305, or step 2306 includes winning notification winning information or miss notification winning information (S2208). If it is determined that there is winning notification winning information or miss notification winning information (S2208: YES), a hold notification command (hold special notification command) is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162 (S2209). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning notification winning information or miss notification winning information (S2208: NO), a hold non-notification command (hold normal notification command) is transmitted (S2210). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving these hold notification command and hold non-notification command will be described in detail later. When the display side MPU 162 receives the hold notification command, the display symbol display area of the symbol display device 80 The hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in Ds *. In addition, when the display-side MPU 162 receives the hold non-notification command, the display-side MPU 162 displays the hold non-notification symbol “◯” in the hold symbol display area Ds * of the symbol display device 80.

  Subsequently, in the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, the secondary holding area RC # corresponding to the total holding number INx added by 1 in step 2201 corresponds to the information stored in step 2205, step 2206, step 2305, step 2306. Various flags are stored (S2211), and then the pending command handling process is terminated. In the processing of step 2211, specifically, when the processing of step 2205 is executed, the winning notification winning flag storage area 211 stores the winning notification winning flag, and when the processing of step 2206 is executed, When the notification non-winning flag is stored in the notification non-winning flag storage area 212 and the process of step 2305 is executed, the off-notification winning flag storing area 213 is stored and the processing of step 2306 is executed. In this case, the outage notification non-winning flag storage area 214 stores the outage notification non-winning flag.

  Next, the operation effective lottery process in step 2007 in the main-side command handling process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the operation valid lottery process.

  First, the value of the total number of holdings INx stored in the secondary total holding number storage area INX of the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b in the voice side RAM 154 is read, and it is determined whether or not the acquired total holding number INx is 2 or more. (S2401). When it is determined that the total number of reservations INx is 2 or more (S2401: YES), the notification winning flag and the notification non-winning are indicated in the slave first to slave eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol reserve ball storage area 154b. It is determined whether a flag is stored (S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether at least one of a winning notification winning flag or a miss notification winning flag and at least one of a winning notification non-winning flag or a miss notification non-winning flag are stored. That is, it is determined whether or not the hold notification symbol “●” and the hold non-notification symbol “◯” are displayed one by one in the first to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80. When it is determined that the notification winning flag and the notification non-winning flag are stored (S2402: YES), the replacement flag is not stored in the sub-holding area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored. It is determined whether or not there is (S2403). That is, it is determined whether there is a pending notification symbol that has not been replaced. The replacement flag is a flag stored in the replacement flag storage area 215 when a replacement lottery described later is won. That is, in the replacement process, a process is performed in which the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol, but is replaced as a hold notification symbol in the first to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80. When only is displayed, the operation notification is not performed.

  When it is determined that there is a substituting area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored and no replacement flag is stored (S2403: YES), an operation notification lottery process is executed (S2404).

  In this operation notification lottery process, first, the value of the operation lottery counter is read from the operation notification lottery counter area 154d of the voice side RAM 154. Here, the operation lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured to add 1 at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and after reaching the maximum value. The configuration is initialized to 0. In the operation notification lottery process, the operation notification lottery table stored in the operation notification lottery table storage area 153a of the voice ROM 153 is referred to, and the value of the read operation notification lottery counter corresponds to the operation winning. It is determined whether or not. The probability of winning the operation is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the operation notification lottery table is set so that the operation notification is won with a probability of 1/5.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the operation notification lottery process is a notification winning (S2405). If it is determined that the notification is won (S2405: YES), a process of writing information indicating the operation notification winning in the retained data area 154f of the voice side RAM 154 is executed (S2406). Thereafter, the audio side MPU 152 stores the operation effective flag in the operation effective flag storage area 154c (S2407), and sets the operation notification time to the operation effective timer counter in the other various counter areas 154h provided in the audio side MPU 152. (S2408), the operation effective lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of holdings INx is not 2 or more (S2401: NO), when it is determined that there is no one in which the replacement flag is not stored in the secondary holding area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored ( (S2403: NO), or when it is determined that it is not a notification winning (S2405: NO), the operation effective lottery process is terminated as it is.

  Then, in the process of step 1909 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36), the audio side MPU 152 acquires the value of the operation valid timer counter set in step 2408 and determines whether or not the operation valid period has elapsed. Note that the update (subtraction) of the numerical value of the operation valid timer counter is executed in the timer update process in step 1906 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

  Returning to the description of the main-side command response processing in FIG. 37, if it is determined that no hold command has been received (S2012: NO), or after execution of the hold command response processing, whether or not a shift command has been received. Is determined (S2014). If it is determined that a shift command has been received (S2014: YES), a shift command response process is performed (S2015). The shift command is a command that is set as an output target when the data in the reserved area in the main RAM 114 is shifted as described in step 502 above. A process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the slave holding areas RC1 to RC8 to the lower area side is executed. Specifically, the data in the slave first reserved area RC1 is cleared, and the slave second reserved area RC2 → the slave first reserved area RC1, the slave third reserved area RC3 → the slave second reserved area RC2, and the slave fourth reserved. Area RC4 → Subordinate third reserved area RC3, Subordinate fifth reserved area RC5 → Subordinate fourth reserved area RC4, Subordinate sixth reserved area RC6 → Subordinate fifth reserved area RC5, Subordinate seventh reserved area RC7 → Subordinate sixth reserved area The data in each area is shifted such as RC6, slave eighth reserved area RC8 → second slave reserved area RC7. Further, in the shift time command handling process, a process of subtracting 1 from the total pending number INx in the slave total pending number storage area INX and a process of transmitting a shift time command to the display side MPU 162 are performed.

  If it is determined that a shift command has not been received (S2014: NO), or after executing a shift command response process, it is determined whether an opening command has been received, as shown in FIG. (S2101). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2101: YES), the winning count update process is executed (S2102). In the update process, a process for updating the win counter is executed so that 1 is added to the win count measured in the win counter provided in the other various counter areas 154h of the voice side RAM 154. Note that the number of hits in the pachinko machine 10 is the number of hit results (so-called consecutive hits) that occur without shifting to the low probability mode after shifting to the high probability mode. The audio side MPU 152 can use the information on the number of hits when determining the contents of the effect. For example, if the number of hits is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding effect such as a predetermined live-action image is displayed in the opening / closing execution mode. To be executed.

  Next, an opening handling process is executed (S2103). In the opening handling process, the type of the winning result that is the trigger for switching to the opening / closing execution mode included in the opening command received this time is specified, and the effect contents in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the opening result are determined. Execute the process for For example, the winning result that has caused the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 16R probability variation result, and in the immediately preceding game round, the symbol display device 80 does not have the same odd symbol combination but the same even symbol. When the combination is displayed as a final stop or when the whale character of FIG. 8 (j) is stopped in the symbol row Z2, the contents for allowing the player to recognize that the result is a 16R probability change result is included. The production to be performed is determined as the production during the current opening / closing execution mode. That is, in the game round effect, the winning result with low game value is confirmed and displayed, but in the subsequent winning effect, the winning promotion effect indicating that the winning value is the winning value with high game value is determined as the effect in the opening / closing execution mode. To do.

  As already described here, in the retained data area 154f of the voice side RAM 154, information on the game result and information on the type of the stop symbol of the game time in the symbol display device 80 are stored with respect to the effect for the game time. When the opening / closing execution mode is entered after the execution of the game times, the game result information and the stop symbol type information stored in the holding data area 154f are cleared when the opening / closing execution mode ends. . Therefore, even if the opening command does not include information on the display content of the symbol display device 80 in the immediately preceding game round, it is possible to execute the effect including the promotion content in the opening / closing execution mode as described above. .

  Moreover, in the opening corresponding | compatible process of step 2103, the number of hits after updating in step 2102 is specified, and the production | presentation according to the specified number of times of winning is set as production in this opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, an opening command corresponding to the processing result of step 2103 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2104). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2101: NO), or after the process of transmitting the opening command is executed, it is determined whether the release command has been received (S2105). If it is determined that the release command has been received (S2105: YES), the display side MPU 162 indicates that the opening of the variable winning device 56 has been newly started, that is, that one round game has been newly started. In order to recognize it, an open command is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2106). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the release command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2105: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the release command, it is determined whether or not the close command has been received (S2107). If it is determined that the close command has been received (S2107: YES), the display is performed in order for the display side MPU 162 to recognize that the variable winning device 56 has been closed, that is, that one round game has ended. A close command is transmitted to the side MPU 162 (S2108). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the closing command has not been received (S2107: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the closing command, it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received (S2109). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2109: YES), an ending handling process is executed (S2110). In the ending handling process, the content of the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the process for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the type of the lottery mode is executed. To do. In the present embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode, the high-probability mode is surely set. Therefore, an effect including content for allowing the player to recognize that the high-probability mode is set is determined as the current ending effect.

  Subsequently, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of step 2110 is transmitted to the display side MPU 162 (S2111). The processing contents of the display side MPU 162 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  When it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S2109: NO), or after executing the process of transmitting the ending command, it is determined whether or not the notification command has been received (S2112). When it is determined that the notification command is received (S2112: YES), it means that an event that should be notified, such as some abnormality or state change of the pachinko machine 10, is occurring in the pachinko machine 10, In order to perform the notification, the light emission data reading process is executed (S2113), and the sound output data reading process is executed (S2114). Thereby, in the light emission control process (S1904) of the timer interruption process (FIG. 36), the light emission control of the illumination unit 33 is performed so that the light emission according to the light emission data is performed, and the sound output of the timer interruption process (FIG. 36). In the control process (S1905), sound output control of the speaker unit 34 is performed so that sound output according to the sound output data is performed. Thereafter, a notification command corresponding to the content of the notification command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S2115). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 controls the display of the symbol display device 80 so that notification corresponding to the notification command is performed.

  When it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2112: NO), or after the process of transmitting the notification command has been executed, it is determined whether a release command has been received (S2116). The release command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 when the event that triggered the transmission of the notification command is resolved. For this reason, if it is determined that a release command has been received (S2116: YES), this means that an event to be notified such as an abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 has been released. In order to cancel the notification, the cancel setting process is executed (S2117). Thereafter, a release command corresponding to the content of the release command received this time is transmitted to the display control device 93 (S2118). When the display control device 93 receives the command, the display control device 93 controls the display of the symbol display device 80 so as to end the execution of the notification corresponding to the release command.

  If it is determined that the cancel command has not been received (S2116: NO), or after executing the cancel setting process, the other corresponding process is performed (S2119), and then the main command response process is terminated. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demo start command has been received. If the demo start command has been received, the demo start command is transmitted to the display control device 93. Thereby, the demonstration display is started in the symbol display device 80.

  Next, the replacement process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) of the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the replacement process.

  In the replacement process, first, information in the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 is read (S2501). Then, it is determined whether or not a hit notification non-winning flag and a miss notification winning flag are stored in the slave first to slave eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8 in the read slave special symbol retaining ball storage area 154b (S2502). . When it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag and the miss notification winning flag are stored (S2502: YES), a replacement lottery process is executed (S2503).

  In the replacement lottery process, first, the value of the replacement lottery counter is read from the replacement lottery counter area 154g provided in the voice side RAM 154. Here, the replacement lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured such that 1 is added at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and after reaching the maximum value. The configuration is initialized to 0. In the replacement lottery process, with reference to the replacement lottery table stored in the replacement lottery table storage area 153c of the voice-side ROM 153, whether or not the read value of the replacement lottery counter corresponds to the replacement win. Determine whether. The probability of winning the replacement is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the replacement lottery table is set so that the winning of replacement is performed with a probability of 1/4.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the replacement lottery process is a replacement winning (S2504). If it is determined that the winning is replacement (S2504: YES), a corresponding reserved symbol replacement command is transmitted (S2505). Specifically, together with information about the smallest number (replacement destination number) of the sub-holding area RC # in which the hit notification non-winning flag is stored, and information to make the holding symbol for the number a holding notification symbol, A replacement command including information regarding the smallest number (replacement source number) in the sub-holding area RC # in which the miss notification winning flag is stored, and information regarding the reserved symbol corresponding to the number as the reserved non-notifying symbol is transmitted. . The processing contents of the display-side MPU 162 upon receipt of the replacement command will be described in detail later. Briefly, when the display-side MPU 162 receives the replacement command, the first to eighth reserved symbols in the symbol display device 80 are received. In the display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the display of the portion where the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed is changed to the hold non-notification symbol “◯”, and the portion where the hold non-notification symbol “○” is displayed The winning winning lottery is changed to the hold notification symbol “●” (see FIGS. 49 to 51).

  After executing the process of transmitting the replacement command, the information (flag) of the secondary reservation area RC # in the secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b is updated based on the replacement command (S2506). That is, the winning notification non-winning flag is erased in the subordinate reserved area RC # of the subordinate holding areas RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, the winning notification winning flag is stored, and the replacement flag is set. Store. Further, in the subordinate reserved area RC # of the subordinate reserved areas RC # in which the outage notification winning flag is stored, the outage notification winning flag is erased and the outage notification non-winning flag is stored. Thereby, in the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42), after the hold notification symbol is replaced, the operation notification that expects the hold notification symbol to be replaced is not displayed, and the trouble due to frequent operation notifications to the player is eliminated. Without letting you feel it, you can focus on the game in a state of moderate expectation.

  When the process of step 2506 is executed, when it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag and the outage notification winning flag are not stored (S2502: NO), or when it is determined that the winning is not a replacement winning (S2504: NO), The operation valid flag stored in the operation valid flag storage area 154c is erased (S2507), and this replacement process is terminated.

<Command handling process executed by the display control device 93>
Next, command response processing executed by the MPU 162 of the display control apparatus 93 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The command received from the sound lamp control device 92 is stored in the command storage area 164a of the work RAM 164 by a command storage process activated when the command is received. The command handling process is a process for executing various controls corresponding to commands stored in the command storage area 164a, which are periodically activated (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec) in the display side MPU 162.

  Note that the command storage area 164a is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored command, and can receive a plurality of commands at the same time. The processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

In the display side MPU 162, various setting processes (write processes) are performed on the work RAM 164 in the command corresponding process, but in a process different from the command corresponding process, one frame corresponding to the update timing according to the various setting processes. A drawing list for displaying the image is created, and the created drawing list (internal command) is transmitted to the VDP 165.
The VDP 165 creates drawing data in the frame area of the video RAM 167 according to the drawing list, and outputs a signal to the symbol display device 80 according to the drawing data created in the frame area. As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the symbol display device 80. As described above, when data is not set in the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 (data indicating blanks is set), it corresponds to the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8. In the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80 is displayed.

  In the command response processing, first, it is determined whether or not a stop result command and a pattern command, or a stop result command, a pattern command, and an operation notification command are received (S2601). If it is determined that the stop result command and pattern command, or the stop result command, pattern command, and operation notification command are received (S2601: YES), the stop result command and pattern command, or the stop result command, pattern command , And a pattern data table corresponding to the combination of operation notification commands is read from the various data table storage areas 163b of the program ROM 163 and written to the work RAM 164 (S2602). Exit.

  The pattern data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current game effect on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the current game round effect is defined.

  As a result, when the operation notification command is received, as shown in FIG. 47, the display “Don't press the button may change the hold symbol !?” is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80. The player is notified that the operation of the first frame button 26 is effective.

  When it is determined that the stop result command and the pattern command, or the stop result command, the pattern command, and the operation notification command are not received (S2601: NO), it is determined whether or not the fixed stop command is received (S2601: NO). S2603). If it is determined that a fixed stop command has been received (S2603: YES), after executing a fixed stop setting process (S2604), the command response process is terminated. In the setting process for fixed stop, a data table for static display of a stop symbol corresponding to the current game time is read from the various data table storage areas 163b of the program ROM 163 until the fixed stop display period elapses. A process of writing to the RAM 164 is executed.

  If it is determined that the confirmation stop command has not been received (S2603: NO), it is determined whether a hold command has been received (S2605). If it is determined that a hold command has been received (S2605: YES), the hold command response process is executed (S2606), and then this command response process is terminated.

  Here, the pending command handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the pending command handling process.

In the hold command handling process, first, the total hold number HNx in the total hold number storage area HNX provided in the work RAM 164 is read, and the total hold number HNx is incremented by 1 (S2701).
Next, it is determined whether or not the hold command is a hold notification command (S2702). If it is determined that the command is a hold notification command (S2702: YES), the hold notification information (hold notification symbol information) is stored in the unit area corresponding to the total hold number HNx added by 1 in step 2701. Then, a hold notification data setting process for writing hold notification information in the work RAM 164 is executed so that the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * (S2703). Thereafter, the pending command handling process ends.

  For example, if the total number of holds HNx added in step 2701 is “2”, the hold notification information is written in the work RAM 164 so that the hold notification information is stored in the second unit area RD2. If the total number HNx added in step 2701 is “4”, the hold notification information is written in the work RAM 164 so that the hold notification information is stored in the fourth unit area RD4.

  As a result, when the hold notification information is written when the total hold number HNx is “2”, as shown in FIG. 48A, the second hold symbol display area Ds2 in the lower display area Ds is displayed. The hold notification symbol “●” is displayed. On the other hand, when the hold notification information is written when the total number HNx is “4”, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), the hold information is held in the fourth hold symbol display area Ds4 of the lower display area Ds. A notification symbol “●” is displayed. In this case, the player can expect that a reach result may occur or a hit result may occur if the game times related to the hold notification symbol “●” are generated. The eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 will also be noted.

  If it is determined that the command is not a hold notification command (S2702: NO), that is, if it is determined that the command is a hold non-notification command, the hold non-notification information (in the unit area corresponding to the total hold number HNx added by 1 in step 2701) On-hold non-notification data setting processing for writing on-hold non-notification information to the work RAM 164 so that the on-hold non-notification symbol “O” is displayed in the on-hold symbol display area Ds *. Is executed (S2704). Thereafter, the pending command handling process ends.

  Returning to the description of the command handling process (FIG. 44), if it is determined that a pending command has not been received (S2605: NO), it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received (S2607). If it is determined that a shift command has been received (S2607: YES), a shift setting process is performed (S2608). In the setting process at the time of shift, the total number of reservations HNx in the total reservation number storage area HNX is decremented by 1, and the reservation symbol information set in the first to eighth unit areas RD1 to RD8 of the reservation symbol display area 167a is displayed. Information to be shifted to the lower area side is written in the work RAM 164. Specifically, the reserved symbol information of the first unit area RD1 is cleared, and the second unit area RD2 → first unit area RD1, third unit area RD3 → second unit area RD2, fourth unit area RD4 → second 3 unit area RD3, 5th unit area RD5 → 4th unit area RD4, 6th unit area RD6 → 5th unit area RD5, 7th unit area RD7 → 6th unit area RD6, 8th unit area RD8 → 7th unit Information to be shifted is written so that the reserved symbol information in each of the unit areas RD1 to RD8 is shifted, such as the area RD7. As a result, in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the lower display area Ds, the reserved symbols are shifted one by one to the smaller (lower) reserved symbol display area Ds *. Thereafter, the command corresponding process is terminated.

  If it is determined that the shift command is not received (S2607: NO), it is determined whether an opening command is received (S2609). If it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2609: YES), after executing the setting process of reading the opening data table corresponding to the opening command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 (S2610), The command response process is terminated.

The opening data table is to display an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for the current opening / closing execution mode on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information in which processing necessary for is defined.
The data structure of the opening data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

  In the opening data table, contents of effects during each round game and during the interval period between round games are determined from the start of the opening effect. In this case, the data during the round game is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is retained until the corresponding round game is completed, and similarly, the data corresponding to the interval ends the corresponding interval. It is set so that the image of the loop or the last update timing is held until. And the range of the information which should be referred in the data table for opening is switched with reception of an open command or a close command.

  If it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2609: NO), it is determined whether any one of the open command and the close command has been received (S2611). If it is determined that any command has been received (S2611: YES), the setting process at the time of opening and closing is executed (S2612), and then this command response process is terminated. In the opening / closing setting process, the range of information to be referred to in the opening data table is switched according to the contents of the received command.

  If it is determined that the open command and the close command are not received (S2611: NO), it is determined whether an ending command is received (S2613). If it is determined that an ending command has been received (S2613: YES), after executing a setting process of reading the ending data table corresponding to the ending command from the program ROM 163 and writing it to the work RAM 164 (S2614), The command response process is terminated.

  The ending data table is necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the current ending effect on the display screen 80a of the symbol display device 80. This is a group of information for which various processes are defined. The data structure of the ending data table is basically the same as that of the pattern data table.

  If it is determined that an ending command has not been received (S2613: NO), another response process (S2615) is executed, and then this command response process is terminated.

  Next, another handling process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another handling process.

In the separate handling process, first, it is determined whether or not a notification command is received (S2801). If it is determined that the notification command is received (S2801: YES), the notification data setting processing is executed (S2802), and then the individual response processing is terminated. In the notification data setting processing, notification data corresponding to the notification content included in the current notification command is written in the work RAM 164 as additional data of the currently set data table.
As a result, when the image is updated next time, the content of the notification data is reflected, and for example, a character image corresponding to the type of event to be notified is added to the effect image for game times and the effect image for the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2801: NO), it is determined whether a release command has been received (S2803). If it is determined that the cancel command has been received (S2803: YES), the notification data clear process is executed (S2804), and then the corresponding process is terminated. In the notification data clear process, the notification corresponding to the type of notification target event set as the notification release target in the release command received this time among the notification data set in the additional data of the data table at present Execute the process to clear the data. As a result, when the image is updated next time, the notification of the type that is the cancellation target is canceled.

  If it is determined that the release command has not been received (S2803: NO), it is determined whether a replacement command has been received (S2805). If it is determined that the replacement command has been received (S2805: YES), the replacement setting process is executed (S2806), and then the individual handling process is terminated. In the replacement setting process, as described in step 2505 of FIG. 43 above, in the replacement command, information related to the replacement destination number, information for changing the reserved symbol corresponding to the number to the reserved notification symbol, and information regarding the replacement source number In addition, since the information for changing the reserved symbol corresponding to the number to the reserved non-notifying symbol is included, the pending notification information is set so that the reserved notification information is stored in the unit area corresponding to the replacement destination number. In addition to writing to the RAM 164, the hold non-notification information is written into the work RAM 164 so that the hold non-notification information is stored in the unit area corresponding to the replacement source number. As described above, the replacement destination number is a winning lottery but not a holding notification lottery.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), the hold notification symbol “●” that is not won in the lottery but won in the hold notification lottery is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2, and the third hold symbol display area Ds3 Although the lottery is won, the hold non-notification symbol “O” which is not won in the hold notification lottery is displayed, and the first, fourth to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1, Ds4 to Ds8 are not won and won. It is assumed that the pending non-notification symbol “◯” that was not won in the notification lottery is displayed. If a replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command includes information for exchanging the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the third reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  Therefore, the display-side MPU 162 stores the hold non-notification information and the hold notification information so that the hold non-notification information is stored in the second unit area RD2 and the hold notification information is stored in the third unit area RD3. Write to work RAM 164.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the hold non-notification symbol “O” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2, and the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the third hold symbol display area Ds3. The

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), although the lottery is not won in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5, the reserved notification symbol “●” won in the reserved notification lottery is displayed, and the third reserved symbol display area Ds3 is displayed. The winning non-notification symbol “O” that was won in the lottery but not in the holding notification lottery is displayed, and the first, second, fourth, sixth to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1, Ds2, Ds4, Assume that a hold non-notification symbol “◯” that is not won in the lottery in Ds6 to Ds8 and not in the hold notification lottery is displayed. If a replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command includes information for exchanging the reserved symbols in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 and the third reserved symbol display area Ds3.

  Therefore, the display-side MPU 162 stores the hold non-notification information and the hold notification information so that the hold non-notification information is stored in the fifth unit area RD5 and the hold notification information is stored in the third unit area RD3. Write to work RAM 164.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 50B, the hold non-notification symbol “◯” is displayed in the fifth hold symbol display area Ds5, and the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the third hold symbol display area Ds3. The

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the second and fifth reserved symbol display areas Ds2 and Ds5 are not won in the lottery, but the reserved notification symbol “●” won in the pending notification lottery is displayed. While the lottery is won in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3, the reserved non-notification symbol “O” which is not won in the holding notification lottery is displayed, and the first, fourth, sixth to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1, It is assumed that a holding non-notification symbol “◯” that is not won in the lottery in Ds4 and Ds6 to Ds8 and is not won in the holding notification lottery is displayed. Assuming that a replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command includes the smallest number in the sub-holding area RC # in which the miss notification winning flag is stored, that is, the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the third reserved symbol display area. Information for replacing the reserved symbol of Ds3 is included.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the hold non-notification symbol “◯” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2, and the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the third hold symbol display area Ds3. The

  Returning to the description of the separate handling process (FIG. 46), if it is determined that the replacement command has not been received (S2805: NO), the other handling process is executed (S2807), and then this separate handling process is terminated. In other handling processing, for example, it is determined whether or not a demo start command has been received. If a demo start command has been received, a data table for performing a demo display is stored in various data table storage areas of the program ROM 163. A process of reading from 163b and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. Further, it is determined whether or not the first frame button operation command has been received. If the first frame button operation command has been received, a data table corresponding to the display mode of the symbol display device 80 is stored in the program ROM 163. A process of reading from the various data table storage area 163b and writing to the work RAM 164 is executed. Thereby, for example, when the game time variation display is not performed, the background stage is changed to another background stage and displayed. In addition, when a notice character or the like is displayed after the start of the variable display, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation regarding the game times is displayed, and when the reach effect is displayed, a chance up effect of the reach effect is displayed. Is done.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, after the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the first to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, the hold notification symbol may be replaced with the hold non-notification symbol “O”. And can provide new game playability. For this reason, a player's attention to a game can be improved, and a player's interest in a game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold notification symbol is switched, the hold notification symbol is displayed by being replaced with the hold non-notification symbol that won the winning lottery but did not win the hold notification lottery. For this reason, the player can first play the game while expecting the on-hold notification symbol to be generated. When the on-hold notification symbol is generated, the button operation notification is displayed on the display screen 80a. A game can be played while expecting, and when a button operation notification is displayed, a game can be played while expecting that the hold notification symbol will be replaced. For this reason, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold notification symbol may be displayed even when winning the winning lottery (FIG. 39, S2203). And, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, even when the hold notification symbol that is won in the lottery and the hold notification lottery is displayed in the fourth hold symbol display area Ds4, the operation notification is generated. (FIG. 42, S2402 to S2404). In this case, the hold notification symbol is not replaced, but a winning result is generated in the game times related to the hold notification symbol that has not been replaced. For this reason, even if the hold notification symbol is not replaced, the player can maintain the expectation for the game times for the hold notification symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning lottery and the reach lottery are not won, it is difficult to win the holding notification lottery (FIG. 41, S2303). For this reason, when the hold notification symbol is not replaced, in the game times related to the hold notification symbol, a hit result or a reach result is likely to occur, and the player's interest in the hold notification symbol is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, no particular control is performed even in game times near the timing of transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode (the number of games is 96 to 100 after the ending is displayed). . That is, as shown in FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, when the operation notification lottery is won and the replacement lottery is won at the boundary of the game times between the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the pending notification symbol is displayed. Have been replaced. As described above, when the hold notification symbol is switched, the replacement destination is a winning non-notification symbol that wins the winning lottery but not the holding notification lottery. In order to shift to the mode, the player can expect a hold notification symbol to be generated even in a game round near the transition timing from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, and expect that the hold notification symbol will be replaced. You can pay attention to the game. In addition, another example will be specifically described in the following fourth embodiment regarding the replacement effect between the hold notification symbol and the hold non-notification symbol regarding the game times near the timing of the transition from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

(Modification of the first embodiment)
A modification of the first embodiment will be described. For example, in the first embodiment, the third lottery is performed even when it is determined that the reach lottery is not won (completely missed), but there is a possibility of becoming a hold notification symbol (FIG. 41, S2303). When it is determined that the reach lottery is not won, the hold notification symbol may not be used. That is, the third hold notification lottery process may not be executed. According to this, when the hold notification symbol is changed, a winning result is generated in the game times related to the hold notification symbol, and even if the hold notification symbol is not changed, it is hit in the game times related to the hold notification symbol. Since a result or a reach result occurs, it can further suppress that a player's interest to a hold alerting symbol falls.

  In the first embodiment, the replacement process is executed when the operation effective period has elapsed in the operation effective period (FIG. 36, S1907 to S1910). If the frame button 26 is not operated, the replacement process may not be performed. According to this, since the replacement process does not occur unless the first frame button 26 is operated, the player can select the generation of the replacement effect. That is, it is possible for the player to select whether or not a win will occur in advance by generating a replacement effect, or whether to enjoy the effect without intentionally generating a replacement effect. For this reason, diversification of games can be achieved, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. In this configuration, since the replacement process is not performed after the operation effective period has elapsed, for example, a process for deleting the operation effective flag may be performed after the operation effective period elapses.

  In addition, when setting it as such a structure, when it is determined not to win a reach lottery, it is preferable not to become a holding | maintenance alerting symbol. That is, it is preferable not to execute the third hold notification lottery process. According to this, when the player does not operate the first frame button 26, the hold notification symbol is displayed as it is, but a hit result or a reach result is generated in the game times related to the hold notification symbol. . For this reason, it can suppress giving the player the discomfort in production.

  Further, the operation valid lottery process may not be performed, and the replacement process may occur at a predetermined timing (such as during a change or a timing across a change). According to this, since the replacement process is executed at an unexpected timing not intended by the player, the player can enjoy the display in the lower display area Ds while enjoying the variable display in the upper display area Dm. , You can enjoy a variety of games by both display areas Dm, Ds. Further, as the predetermined timing, for example, when any one of the flags is stored in the slave 1st to 8th reserved symbol storage areas RC1 to RC8, that is, the 1st to 8th reserved symbol display of the symbol display device 80. The replacement process may be performed when all the reserved symbols are displayed in the areas Ds1 to Ds8. According to this, when the hold notification symbol is displayed, the player continues to play the game while expecting that the hold notification symbol will be replaced. Can improve interest.

  Further, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 41), in the second and third hold notification lottery processes (S2302 and S2303), the slave 1st to 8th hold areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b. When the hit notification non-winning flag is stored and the outage notification winning flag is not stored, the probability that the outage notification is generated is higher than the case where the outage notification winning flag is stored. May be. Similarly, in the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42), when the winning notification non-winning flag is stored and the miss notification non-winning flag is stored, in the operation notification lottery process (S2404), these flags Compared to the case where is not stored, the probability of an operation notification may be increased. According to this, when the hit notification non-winning flag is stored, the hold notification symbol is easily generated and the hold notification symbol is easily replaced. For this reason, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the hold notification symbol. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, in the above, when a replacement command is transmitted in the voice side MPU 152 (FIG. 43, S2505), it is related to the smallest number (replacement destination number) in the sub-holding area RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored. Along with the information and the information for changing the holding symbol for the number to the holding notification symbol, the information of the smallest number (replacement source number) in the sub-holding area RC # in which the outage notification winning flag is stored, and the number The example which transmits the replacement command containing the information which makes a hold symbol a hold non-notification symbol was demonstrated. However, the secondary reservation area RC # that is the replacement source can be changed as appropriate, and may be the highest number (substitution number) in the secondary reservation area RC # in which the miss notification winning flag is stored. That is, for example, with reference to the example of FIG. 51, the hold notification symbol in the fifth hold symbol display area Ds5 and the hold non-notification symbol in the third hold symbol display area Ds3 may be switched. Further, the sub-holding area RC # as the replacement source may be determined by lottery processing.

  In the first embodiment, the display-side MPU 162 may sequentially change the hold notification symbols in one game time (one change). For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), a hold notification symbol “●” which is not won in the lottery but won in the hold notification lottery is displayed in the fifth hold symbol display area Ds5, and the second hold symbol display area Ds2 The hold non-notification symbol “◯” that is won in the lottery but not in the hold notification lottery is displayed, and the first, third, fourth, sixth to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds4, Ds6 It is assumed that a holding non-notification symbol “◯” which is not won in the lottery and won in the holding notification lottery is displayed on “Ds8”. When the voice side MPU 152 wins the replacement lottery process (FIG. 43, S2503), the display side MPU 162 holds the reserved symbols in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 as shown in FIG. 55 (b). The notification symbol “◯” is set and the reserved symbol in the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4 is changed to the reserved notification symbol “●”. Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), the reserved symbol in the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4 is reserved. The symbol is set to the hold non-notification symbol “◯” and the hold symbol of the third hold symbol display area Ds3 is set to the hold notification symbol “●”. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), the third hold symbol display area The reserved symbol of Ds3 may be set to the reserved non-notification symbol “◯” and the reserved symbol of the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 may be set to the reserved notification symbol “●”. In other words, the hold notification symbol may be sequentially replaced with the adjacent hold non-notification symbol. In other words, the previous notifications that are consecutive in the notified order may be exchanged. According to this, the player pays attention to where the on-hold notification symbol stops, so that the interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, although the example which moves a holding | maintenance alert | report symbol sequentially in 1 game time was demonstrated here, the holding | payment non-notification symbol which won the winning lottery but was not won for the holding | reserving alert lottery and the winning notification lottery which was not won Depending on the positional relationship with the on-hold notification symbol that has been won, the on-hold notification symbol may be sequentially switched over a plurality of game times. Further, such replacement of the hold notification symbol and the hold non-notification symbol may be similarly performed in the following embodiment.

  Further, in the hold command setting process (FIG. 32), after setting the hold commands in steps 1502, 1504, and 1505, the process for setting the information on the total hold number for the hold command is executed. Also good. In this case, the voice-side MPU 152 may specify the secondary reservation area RC # of the secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b based on the information on the total number of reservations included in the reservation command.

  Furthermore, although not specifically described in the first embodiment, when a transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. You may make it not display. Then, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the first to eighth reserved symbols are newly added after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When displaying the hold symbol in the symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, if the hold notification symbol is displayed before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the hold notification symbol may be displayed as it is, or the hold notification symbol may be displayed. The hold non-notification symbol may be displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * where has been displayed.

(Second Embodiment)
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the pseudo-pending notification lottery process and the replacement process executed by the voice side MPU 152 are changed so that the holding notification symbol is replaced in addition to the holding non-notifying symbol winning in the winning lottery. Is. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the configuration of the voice side ROM 153 and the voice side RAM 154 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in this embodiment, the voice ROM 153 is provided with an acceptance lottery table storage area 153e in addition to the various areas 153a to 153d. The voice RAM 154 is provided with an acceptance lottery counter area 154i in addition to the various areas 154a to 154h.

  Next, the configuration of the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, in addition to various flag storage areas 211 to 215, an acceptance winning flag storage area 216 is provided. The acceptance winning flag storage area 216 is an area in which, when a hold command is received, an acceptance lottery process (FIG. 58, S2307), which will be described later, is executed and a flag is stored when the acceptance winning is achieved.

  Next, the pseudo hold notification process (FIG. 39, S2207) executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the pseudo hold notification lottery process. This process is basically the same process as the pseudo hold notification lottery process described with reference to FIG. 41. In contrast to the pseudo hold notification lottery process described with reference to FIG. This is a process in which an acceptance process (S2307 to S2309) that may be replaced with a symbol is added.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58, after storing the non-winning information in step 2306, the acceptance lottery is performed (S2307). In this acceptance lottery, first, the value of the acceptance lottery counter is read from the acceptance lottery counter area 154i of the voice side RAM 154. Here, the acceptance lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured such that 1 is added at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and after reaching the maximum value. The configuration is initialized to 0. In the acceptance lottery process, with reference to the acceptance lottery table stored in the acceptance lottery table storage area 153e of the voice ROM 153, whether or not the value of the read acceptance lottery counter corresponds to the acceptance winning. Determine whether. The probability of winning the winning is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, if it is a miss reach-reserved hold command, it is accepted with a probability of 1/20, and if it is not a miss reach-retained hold command, it is 1/100. An acceptance lottery table is set so as to win the winning with probability.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the acceptance lottery process is an acceptance winning (S2308). If it is determined that the acceptance lottery is received (S2308: YES), it is stored in the register of the voice MPU 152 in step 2306. The winning winning information is stored together with the missed notification non-winning information (S2309). After the acceptance winning information is stored, or when it is determined that the acceptance lottery is not won (S2308: NO), the pseudo hold notification lottery process is terminated.

  Thereby, when the acceptance winning information is stored in step 2309 of the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 58), in step 2211 of the hold command response process (FIG. 39), the step in the secondary special symbol hold ball storage area 154b. In 2201, the acceptance flag is stored in the acceptance winning flag storage area 216 of the secondary suspension area RC # corresponding to the total number of retentions INx incremented by one. In step 2211 of the pending command handling process (FIG. 39), if the acceptance winning information is stored in step 2309 of the pseudo pending notification lottery process (FIG. 58), only the acceptance flag is stored, and the miss notification non-winning flag is set. Do not store.

  Next, the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 37, S2007) executed by the voice side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the operation valid lottery process. This process is basically the same process as the operation effective lottery process described with reference to FIG. 42, and is different from the operation effective lottery process described with reference to FIG. 42 in the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. This is a process in which a process (S2402a) for determining whether or not an acceptance winning flag is stored in the 1st to 8th reserved areas RC1 to RC8 is added.

  In the operation valid lottery process, when it is determined that the total number of reservations INx is 2 or more (S2401: YES), the slaves 1 to 8 of the secondary special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b are notified to the secondary 1 to secondary reservation areas RC1 to RC8. It is determined whether a winning flag, a notification non-winning flag, or an acceptance winning flag is stored (S2402a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not at least one of a winning notification winning flag or a miss notification winning flag and at least one of a winning notification non-winning flag, a missing notification non-winning flag, or an acceptance winning flag is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not the hold notification symbol “●” and the hold non-notification symbol “◯” are displayed one by one in the first to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80. If it is determined that a notification winning flag and a notification non-winning flag or an acceptance winning flag are stored (S2402a: YES), the processing after step 2403 is executed. Thereby, even when the winning notification non-winning flag is not stored, if the winning winning flag is stored, the operation notification is displayed on the symbol display device 80 if the operation notification in step 2405 is won.

  Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the replacement process. This process is basically the same process as the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43, and in contrast to the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43, the slaves 1 to 1 in the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. The process (S2502a) for determining whether or not the acceptance winning flag is stored in the 8-hold areas RC1 to RC8 is replaced with step 2502 in FIG.

  Specifically, in the replacement process, after reading the information of the slave special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b of the voice side RAM 154 (S2501), the slaves 1 to 8 hold in the read slave special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b. It is determined whether at least one of the hit notification non-winning flag or the acceptance winning flag is stored in the areas RC1 to RC8, and whether the outage notification winning flag is stored (S2502a).

  If it is determined that at least one of the winning notification non-winning flag or the acceptance winning flag is stored and the missed notification winning flag is stored (S2502a: YES), a replacement lottery process similar to the above is performed. (S2503), if it is determined that the winning is replacement (S2504: YES), a corresponding reserved symbol replacement command is transmitted (S2505). Specifically, in this process, when the winning notification non-winning flag and the acceptance winning flag are stored, the smallest number (replacement) in the sub-holding area RC # storing the winning notification non-winning flag is stored. Information on the smallest number (replacement source number) in the sub-holding area RC # in which the off-notification winning flag is stored together with information on the previous number) and information on making the holding symbol for the number a holding notification symbol , And a replacement command including information that sets the reserved symbol corresponding to the number as the reserved non-notifying symbol. When only the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, a replacement command similar to that in the first embodiment is transmitted. If only the acceptance winning flag is stored, the information regarding the smallest number (replacement destination number) in the sub-reservation area RC # in which the acceptance winning flag is stored, and the holding symbol for the number are displayed. The information about the smallest number (substitution number) in the sub-holding area RC # in which the off-notification winning flag is stored together with the information to be held notification symbol, and the reserved symbol for the number as the reserved non-notification symbol Send a replacement command with information.

  Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 will be described. The display-side MPU 162 executes the above-described processing when receiving each command, and executes the replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806) when receiving the replacement command. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (a), the holding notification symbol “●” which is not won in the lottery but won in the holding notification lottery is displayed in the fourth holding symbol display area Ds4, and the second holding symbol display area Ds2 Although the lottery was not won and the hold notification lottery was not won, the hold non-notification symbol “O” won in the acceptance lottery is displayed, and the first, third, fifth to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1, It is assumed that a holding non-notification symbol “◯” which is not won in the lottery for Ds3, Ds5 to Ds8 and is not won in the holding notification lottery or the acceptance lottery is displayed. If a replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command includes information for exchanging the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed by the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2, and the fourth hold symbol is displayed. The hold non-notification symbol “◯” is displayed in the display area Ds4.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 is not won in the lottery and the winning notification lottery is not won, but the reserved non-notifying symbol “winned in the receiving lottery” “” Is displayed, the lottery is not won in the fourth hold symbol display area Ds4, but the hold notification symbol “●” which is won in the hold notification lottery is displayed, and the lottery is won in the sixth hold symbol display area Ds6. The reserved non-notification symbol “◯” that was not won in the notification lottery is displayed, and the lottery is won in the first, third, fifth, seventh, and eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds5, Ds7, and Ds8. In addition, it is assumed that the hold non-notification symbol “◯” that is not won in either the hold notification lottery or the acceptance lottery is displayed. Assuming that a replacement command is received in this state, as described above, when the notification non-winning flag is stored in the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, the replacement command is prioritized. Therefore, information for exchanging the reserved symbols in the fourth reserved symbol display area Ds4 and the sixth reserved symbol display area Ds6 is included. Therefore, when the replacement setting process is executed by the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the sixth hold symbol display area Ds6, and the fourth hold symbol is displayed. The hold non-notification symbol “◯” is displayed in the display area Ds4.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

First, in the present embodiment, even if the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in place of the hold non-notification symbol “◯”, the replacement destination is not included in the lottery.
In other words, it is not certain that a winning result will occur in the game times related to the replaced hold notification symbols. For this reason, it can be regarded as one production | presentation (what is called a game chance up production | presentation) that the hold notification symbol and the hold non-notification symbol are switched and displayed, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the player expects whether or not the hold that won the first and second start ports 54 and 55 is displayed as the hold notification symbol (whether the chance is increased), and further holds the hold notification symbol. You can pay attention to the game while expecting whether or not will be replaced (or whether it will increase the chance). For this reason, a player's interest in a game can be improved and it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  Further, the acceptance winning flag is easier to store when the outreach-reserved hold command is received than when the outreach-retained hold command is not received (when other supported hold commands are received) (FIG. 58). , S2307). For this reason, when the destination to be replaced is not the winning lottery, the reach result is likely to be generated, so that it is possible to diversify the game without lowering the display significance of the hold notification symbol.

  In addition, when winning the replacement lottery, when both the notification non-winning flag and the winning winning flag are stored in the slave first to slave eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol holding ball storage area 154b The hold non-notification symbol corresponding to the sub-holding area RC # storing the hit notification non-winning flag is replaced with the hold notification symbol (FIG. 60, S2505). Therefore, when both the notification non-winning flag and the receiving winning flag are stored in the slave first to slave eighth retaining areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol retaining ball storage area 154b, the winning winning flag is stored. For example, in comparison with the case where the hold non-notification symbol corresponding to the subordinate hold area RC # is replaced with the hold notification symbol, for example, an effect that a winning result is generated in the game times related to the hold non-notification symbol immediately before the replaced hold notification symbol. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above uncomfortable feeling.

(Modification of the second embodiment)
A modification of the second embodiment will be described. For example, in the second embodiment, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 58), the acceptance lottery process may not be executed if the hold command is not an outreach compatible hold command. According to this, when the hold notification symbol and the hold non-notification symbol are switched, in the game times related to the hold notification symbol, a hit result occurs or a reach result occurs even if no hit result occurs. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game information regarding the replaced hold notification symbol and the hold notification symbol.

  Further, in the replacement process (FIG. 60), when a replacement lottery is won and a replacement command is transmitted, if both the notification non-winning flag and the received winning flag are stored in the sub-holding area RC #, the replacement is performed. You may make it determine the subordinate holding | maintenance area RC # which becomes a destination by lottery.

  Further, as in the modification of the first embodiment, the replacement process (FIG. 60) is not performed when the first frame button 26 is not operated during the operation valid period, and the replacement process (FIG. 60). Then, the replacement lottery process (S2503) may not be performed. According to this, when the player operates the first frame button 26, if the non-notification winning flag or the acceptance winning flag is stored in the sub-reservation area RC #, the replacement of the holding notification symbol is always generated. However, if the hold non-notification symbol and the hold notification symbol corresponding to the sub-holding area RC # in which the acceptance winning flag is stored are replaced, a winning result is generated in the game times related to the replaced hold notification symbol. do not do. On the other hand, if the hold notification symbol is displayed by winning the winning lottery and also making the hold notification lottery, even if the player operates the first frame button 26, the hold notification symbol does not change. A collapsing production occurs. In other words, it is possible to generate a premier effect (an effect in which a winning result is always generated) that breaks the law that the hold notification symbol does not change even though the first frame button 26 is operated. For this reason, further diversification of games can be achieved, and the player's interest in games can be improved.

(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, by displaying separately the reserved symbols relating to the first lottery game and the reserved symbols relating to the second lottery game, the player is given a chance to win which starting port. This makes it easy to determine whether the game is to be played. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

First, the hold command setting process (FIG. 20, S406) triggered by the winning to the first start port 54 executed by the main MPU 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a hold command setting process triggered by winning at the first start port 54.
This processing is basically the same processing as the setting of the hold command triggered by winning at the first start port 54 described with reference to FIG. 32. To the first start port 54 described with reference to FIG. This is a process in which a process for setting winning information (S1506) is added to the process for setting a hold command triggered by the winning of S.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the hold command setting process triggered by winning at the first start port 54, after setting the hold command in step 1502, step 1504, and step 1505, the first start is set to the hold command. After setting information triggered by winning a prize to the mouth 54 (S1506), the setting process of the hold command is terminated. Specifically, in the process of step 1506, the winning command to which start port is triggered in response to the hold command set in any of the processes of step 1502, step 1504, or step 1505. Set the information to identify this.

  Note that the hold command setting process (FIG. 20, S412) triggered by winning at the second starting port 55 is basically triggered by winning at the first starting port 54 described in FIG. Since it is the same as the setting process of the hold command, and only the information that is triggered by winning in the second start port 55 is set in the hold command, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the hold command response processing (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the voice side MPU 152 in the present embodiment will be described.

  First, before explaining the hold command handling process, the display mode displayed in the first to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80.

In the present embodiment, the display side MPU 162 basically holds the first lottery game holding symbols in the first to eighth holding symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, as shown in FIG. Is displayed as “◯”, and “Δ” is displayed as the reserved symbol of the second lottery game. That is, in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the reserved symbol of the first lottery game and the reserved symbol of the second lottery game are displayed separately. In addition, “●” is displayed as a reserved symbol for allowing the player to detect in advance that a reach result or a winning result may occur as the reserved symbol of the first and second lottery games.
In the following description, the hold symbol “◯” and the hold symbol “Δ” will be described as a hold non-notification symbol (first destination notification), and the hold symbol “●” will be described as a hold notification symbol (second destination notification).

  Here, as described in the first embodiment, the distribution mode of the game result when winning is the winning combination when the winning to the first starting port 54 is used as the opportunity, The chance of winning the 16R probability change with the winning of the first starting port 54 is different from the case of winning the winning of the starting port 55. The opportunity is lower than the probability of winning per 16R probability change (FIG. 16). Note that the 16R probability variation result is one of the most advantageous results for the player.

  Therefore, when the hold notification symbol is displayed, the player has a hold notification symbol for the hold symbol of the second lottery game, rather than displaying a hold notification symbol for the hold symbol of the first lottery game. When displayed, the interest in the game times for the hold notification symbol is likely to increase. In other words, when the hold notification symbol is displayed for the hold symbol of the first lottery game, the game related to the hold notification symbol is more than when the hold notification symbol is displayed for the hold symbol of the second lottery game. There is a problem that interest in times tends to decrease. That is, when the reserved symbol of the first lottery game becomes the reserved notification symbol, the player may be discouraged even though the expected value as a winning result is increased.

  Next, the structure of the slave 1st-8th reservation area RC1-RC8 of the slave special symbol reservation ball storage area 154b provided in the audio | voice side RAM154 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a configuration of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

  As shown in FIG. 65, in the secondary special symbol retaining ball storage area 154b, a winning start opening storage area 217 is provided in addition to the various flag storage areas 211 to 215. In the winning start port storage area 217, as described above, the hold command includes information on which start port 54, 55 is the opportunity to win, so based on the information, This is an area for storing information for determining whether or not a winning at the start ports 54 and 55 is triggered.

  Next, the hold command handling process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the pending command handling process. This process is basically the same process as the hold command handling process described with reference to FIG. 39, and a process for transmitting a hold notification command in step 2209 to the hold command described with reference to FIG. This is a process in which a process for setting the winning start information is added in the process of transmitting the pending non-notification command in step 2210, and the process for storing the winning start information (S2211a) is replaced with step 2211 in FIG. .

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the hold command handling process, a hold notification command is transmitted in step 2209, and a hold non-notification command is transmitted in step 2210. At this time, the hold command transmitted from the main MPU 112 is triggered by information that is triggered by a winning at the first starting port 54 or a winning at the second starting port 55 as described above. Since either one of the information that is to be included is included, a hold notification command or a hold non-notification command including winning start information is transmitted based on the information.

  As a result, when the display-side MPU 162 receives the hold non-notification command, the display side MPU 162 determines the start opening 54, 55 where the game ball has won, and the hold non-notification symbol “s” is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * of the symbol display device 80. “○” or “△” is displayed. When the hold notification command is transmitted, the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * regardless of whether the winning at the first starting port 54 or the winning at the second starting port 55. Is displayed. Therefore, the hold notification command may not include winning start information.

  Next, in the sub-reservation area RC # corresponding to the total number of reservations INx added by 1 in step 2201 in the sub-special symbol storage area 154b, step 2205 and step 2206 in FIG. 66, and step 2305 and step 2306 in FIG. In addition to storing the various flags corresponding to the notification information stored in (5), the winning start information is stored (S2211a).

  Subsequently, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the replacement process. This process is basically the same process as the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43, and the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43 is changed by the start ports 54 and 55 that have won the replacement lottery process. This is the process (S2508, S2503a, S2503b).

  Specifically, in the replacement process, when it is determined that a winning notification non-winning flag and a miss notification non-winning flag are stored (S2502: YES), the subordinate holding area RC in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored It is determined whether or not the information in the # winning start port storage area 217 is the first start port 54 (S2508). If it is determined that the information in the winning start opening storage area 217 is the first starting opening 54 (S2508: YES), the first replacement lottery process is executed (S2503a), and the information in the winning start opening storing area 217 is determined. Is determined not to be the first start port 54 (S2508: NO), that is, when it is determined that the information in the winning start port storage area 217 is the second start port 55, the second replacement lottery process is executed. (S2503b).

  The first and second replacement lottery processes are basically the same as the replacement lottery process described in step 2503 above, and refer to the replacement lottery table stored in the replacement lottery table storage area 153c of the voice ROM 153. Then, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the replacement winning, but the tables referred to in the first replacement lottery process and the second replacement lottery process are different. More specifically, the probability that the second replacement lottery process will be replaced is higher than the first replacement lottery process. The probability of winning a replacement is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, the first replacement lottery process is a replacement winning with a probability of 1/4, and the second replacement lottery process is a replacement winning with a probability of 1/2. The replacement lottery table is set in In other words, when the hold symbol related to the second lottery game having a high probability of being advantageous to the player (resulting in a 16R probability variation result) is the hold non-notification symbol, the hold symbol related to the first lottery game is not hold non-notification. It is easier to win a replacement lottery than when it is a symbol.

  Next, when it is determined that a replacement is won (S2504: YES), a replacement command is transmitted (S2505). Specifically, in addition to the various information described in the first embodiment, a replacement command including winning start information is transmitted. Then, after executing the processing of step 2506 and step 2507, the replacement processing is terminated.

  Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 will be described. The display-side MPU 162 executes the above-described processing when receiving each command, and executes the replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806) when receiving the replacement command. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the second reserved symbol display area Ds 2 is won and the lottery is won, but the reserved non-notification symbol “Δ” that is not won in the pending notification lottery is displayed, and the fifth reserved symbol is displayed. Although the lottery is won in the display area Ds5, the hold notification symbol “●” won in the hold notification lottery is displayed, and the first, third, fourth, sixth to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds4, Assume that a hold non-notification symbol “◯” or “Δ” that is not won in the lottery in Ds6 to Ds8 but not in the hold notification lottery is displayed.

  Assuming that a replacement command is received in this state, the replacement command includes information for exchanging the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5. For this reason, when the replacement setting process is executed by the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2, and the fifth hold symbol is displayed. The hold non-notification symbol “Δ” is displayed in the display area Ds5. That is, the hold non-notification symbol and the hold notification symbol related to the second lottery game are switched. Since the replacement command includes winning start information, a reserved non-notification symbol corresponding to the start port originally displayed in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 is displayed in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5. You may make it display. That is, in FIG. 68 (b), the hold non-notification symbol “◯” may be displayed in the fifth hold symbol display area Ds 5.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game and the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game are displayed separately, and the player holds the reserved symbol for the lottery game in which the corresponding game times are the first and second lottery games. Can be easily discriminated (FIG. 64). In addition, when the winning result is, the probability of winning per 16R probability change with the winning of the first starting port 54 is lower than the probability of winning per 16R probability change with the winning of the second starting port 55. Therefore, it is easier for a player to obtain a result that is more advantageous when winning in the second lottery game.

For this reason, when the hold symbol related to the first lottery game is displayed as the hold notification symbol, the player displays the hold symbol related to the second lottery game as the hold notification symbol even though the probability of being a winning result is high. There is a possibility that the person who was happily pleased or disappointed that the hold symbol related to the second lottery game is not displayed as the hold notification symbol. That is, when the hold symbol related to the first lottery game is displayed as the hold notification symbol, the display of the hold notification symbol may have an adverse effect. However, in the present embodiment, even if the hold notification symbol is displayed for the first lottery game, the hold notification symbol may be replaced with the hold non-notification symbol for the second lottery game by the replacement process (FIG. 67, S2503b). ), The player can continue the game while expecting the hold notification symbols to be replaced.
For this reason, a player's interest in a game can be improved. As in the first embodiment, in the present embodiment, the destination to be replaced is a win that wins a winning lottery but has not won a hold notification lottery. For this reason, for example, even if the hold notification symbol related to the second lottery game is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol related to the first lottery game, the player generates a hit result with the replaced hold notification symbol. Maintain interest in game times related to symbols.

  Further, when winning information for the second starting port 55 is stored in the winning starting port storage area 217 of the sub-holding area RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, it is easy to win the replacement lottery. (FIG. 67, S2503b). Therefore, when the hold notification symbol is displayed on the hold symbol for the first lottery game, the player further wins the replacement lottery (the hold non-notification symbol for the second lottery game is replaced with the hold notification symbol). The game can be continued while expecting.

(First Modification of Third Embodiment)
A first modification of the third embodiment will be described. For example, in the hold command handling process (FIG. 66), in the first hold notification lottery process in step 2203a, the winning start port information included in the hold command is determined and the winning is to the second start port 54. May make it difficult to win a notification.

  Further, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 41), when the winning notification non-winning flag triggered by winning the second start port 54 is stored, the second hold notification lottery process in step 2302 and the step 2303 In the third hold notification lottery process, the probability of winning the notification may be increased. Further, in the second hold notification lottery process in step 2302 and the third hold notification lottery process in step 2303, it is possible to make it easier to win a notification when the first start port 54 is won.

  In the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42), in the operation notification lottery process in step 2404, the winning start port storage area 217 of the secondary holding area RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored is transferred to the second start port 54. If the information indicating the winning is stored, the probability of winning the operation notification may be increased.

  By changing the lottery probability as described above, it becomes easy to replace the hold non-notification symbol related to the second lottery game and the hold notification symbol related to the first lottery game, and when the hold symbol is changed, the change related to the hold notification symbol changed. It is easy to generate a winning result advantageous to the player in the game times. For this reason, it becomes easy for the player to experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the hold notification symbol related to the first lottery game with the hold non-notification symbol related to the second lottery game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

(Second Modification of Third Embodiment)
A second modification of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, “●” is used as a holding symbol for the player to detect in advance that a reach result or a winning result may occur as a holding symbol for the first and second lottery games. Although the displayed example has been described, in the holding symbols of the first and second lottery games, distinguish the holding symbols that let the player know in advance that a reach result or a winning result may occur. You may do it. For example, as shown in FIG. 69, “●” is displayed as a holding symbol of the first lottery game that allows the player to detect in advance that a reach result or a hit result may occur, and reach “▲” may be displayed as the reserved symbol of the second lottery game that allows the player to detect in advance that a result may occur or a winning result may occur.

  According to this, the player can easily discriminate whether the replaced holding notification symbol is the holding symbol relating to the first lottery game or the holding symbol relating to the second lottery game, and the player can comfortably play the game without being confused by the game. Can continue.

(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the role (suggested content) of the hold notification symbol is changed between the low probability mode and the high probability mode with respect to the first embodiment. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the reserved symbol in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, basically, “◯” is displayed as a reserved symbol related to the first and second lottery games. In addition, in the low probability mode (second game mode, low frequency support mode), “●” is used as a holding symbol to notify the player in advance when a missed reach result occurs or a hit result occurs. Is displayed. That is, in the low probability mode, when “●” is displayed as the reserved symbol, it is determined that at least a reach fluctuation occurs regardless of whether or not it is a hit. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode (the first game mode, the high frequency support mode), in the present embodiment, a hit result is always generated when a reach variation occurs. That is, in the high-probability mode, if a reserved symbol “●” at which reach variation is fixed is displayed, a winning result is always generated in the game times related to the reserved symbol. In the following description, as the holding symbol, the holding symbol “◯” will be described as a holding non-notifying symbol (first destination notification), and the holding symbol “●” will be described as a holding notification symbol (second destination notification).

  Next, the display mode of the upper display area Dm in the symbol display device 80 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the upper display area Dm in the symbol display device 80.

  In the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, “high probability mode” is displayed in the high probability mode, and the player displays “high probability mode” in the upper display area Dm. By checking whether or not “Middle” is displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether the current game time is in the high probability mode or the low probability mode. In the upper display area Dm, when the high probability mode is in effect, the remaining number of high probability mode games (the remaining 77 in FIG. 70) is also displayed.

  Thus, in order to display the display in the high probability mode and the remaining number of high probability mode games in the symbol display device 80, for example, in the main MPU 112, the high probability mode in the special power termination process (FIG. 29). When storing a flag, a high probability command is set as an output target. Then, according to the other various counter areas 154h of the voice side RAM 154, a high probability game number counter is provided to count the number of games in the high probability mode, and a command corresponding to the number of games in the high probability mode is displayed on the display side MPU 162. To display on the display side MPU 162 whether or not the high probability mode is in effect, and when the high probability mode is in effect, the remaining number of high probability games may be displayed. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, description will be given of confirmation processing for holding advance notice triggered by winning at the first start port 54. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing a confirmation process for holding notice triggered by winning at the first start port 54. This process is basically the same process as the confirmation process for the hold notice triggered by the winning at the first starting port explained in FIG. 30 and the confirmation for the hold notice explained in FIG. It is the process which added the process (S1315) which determines whether it is a low probability mode with respect to a process.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the winning combination is not made (S1306: NO), it is determined (estimated) whether or not the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode at the time when the game turn related to the holding is started ( S1315). For this determination, for example, the result determined in step 1303 is stored in the register of the main MPU 112 and is determined based on the information stored in the register. When it is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode (S1315: NO), that is, when it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode, as described above, in the case of the high probability mode, only the hit result is obtained. Since the reach result is generated, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is terminated without determining whether the reach result is generated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode (S1315: YES), the processing of step 1311 to step 1314 is executed.

  Note that the confirmation process for holding notice triggered by winning at the second start opening 55 is similar to the confirmation process for holding notice triggered by winning at the first start opening 54 described in FIG. When it is determined that it is not a winning combination with respect to the confirmation process for holding advance notice triggered by winning at the second starting port 54 described with reference to FIG. 31 (S1406: NO), it is determined whether or not the low probability mode is set. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  In addition, although not particularly illustrated, in the variation display time grasping process in step 509 in the special figure variation start process (FIG. 22), in the case of the high probability mode, when the result is not a hit result, as in the confirmation process for the hold notice. Determines that no reach result occurs.

  Next, the pseudo notification lottery process (FIG. 39, S2207) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the pseudo hold lottery process. This process is basically the same process as the pseudo hold lottery explained with reference to FIG. 41, but the third hold notice lottery process (S2303) is different from the pseudo hold notice lottery process explained with reference to FIG. This is a process that does not perform.

  Specifically, if it is determined that the command is not a detach reach hold command (S2301: NO), the miss notification non-winning information is stored (S2306), and the pseudo hold notification process is terminated as it is. In other words, in the present embodiment, when neither the winning lottery nor the reach lottery is won, the hold notification command is not transmitted. In other words, when a hold notification symbol is displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, a winning result or a reach result is always generated in the game times related to the hold notification symbol. . It should be noted that the detach reach correspondence hold command is transmitted from the main MPU 112 only in the low probability mode, as described in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

  Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 will be described. When all the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 indicate the lottery results related to the low probability mode, the reserved notification symbol is displayed when no reach result is generated. Since only the difference is not different from the first embodiment, detailed description is omitted.

  First, when the remaining high probability mode is 99 to 8 times, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are all reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode. For this reason, when a hold notification symbol is displayed in the first to eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, a winning result is always generated in the game times related to the hold notification symbol. In the present embodiment, in the case of the high probability mode, the outreach-reserving hold command is not transmitted from the main MPU 112, so that the outage notification winning information is not stored. That is, in the high probability mode, the winning lottery is not won, but the hold notification lottery is not won. For this reason, the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42) may not be performed in the remaining high probability mode 99 to 8 times.

  On the other hand, when the remaining high probability mode is 7 to 1 times, as shown in FIG. 73, in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed. And the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed together (mixed). FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed on the symbol display device 80.

  As shown in FIG. 73, for example, when there are three remaining high probability modes, the first to third reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds3 display the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode. On the eighth hold symbol Ds4 to Ds8, a hold symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode is displayed. In the symbol display device 80, the player can easily determine the area where the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed and the region where the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed. As described above, the high probability mode and the low probability mode are displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the background screen of the reserved symbol display area Ds * on which the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode is displayed blinks, or the lottery game in the high probability mode is displayed. The background screen of the reserved symbol display area Ds * where the reserved symbols are displayed and the background screen of the reserved symbol display area Ds * where the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed are different screens (colors). It may be.

  And, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2, the holding non-notifying symbol “O” which is won in the winning lottery but not won in the holding notification lottery is displayed. Although the lottery is not won in the sixth holding symbol display area Ds6, the holding notification symbol “●” that is won in the holding notification lottery may be displayed. In this case, assuming that the replacement lottery is won and the display side MPU 162 receives the replacement command, the replacement command includes information for switching the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the sixth reserved symbol display area Ds6. ing. For this reason, when the replacement setting process is executed in the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), the hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2, and the sixth hold symbol is displayed. The hold non-notification symbol “◯” is displayed in the display area Ds6. In other words, when the hold notification symbol “●”, which has only confirmed the occurrence of reach in the low probability mode, is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol “○” in the high probability mode, the hold notification in the replaced high probability mode is performed. In the game times related to the symbol “●”, it is determined that a winning result is generated.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, in this embodiment, the holding notification symbol (the holding symbol related to the lottery result in the low probability mode) exceeding the specified number of times in the high probability mode is the holding non-notifying symbol (the high probability mode in the high probability mode). It is possible to give a gameability that it may be replaced with a holding symbol related to the lottery result, and to diversify the game.

  In the high probability mode, the hold notification symbol is displayed only when winning the winning lottery. In the low probability mode, the holding notification symbol is displayed only when winning the winning lottery or when winning the reach lottery. (S2203 in FIG. 39, S2302 in FIG. 72). For this reason, even if the reserved symbols for the specified number of times in the high probability mode are displayed, the player first continues to play the game while expecting that the reserved notification symbols are displayed in the low probability mode. When the hold notification symbol is displayed at, attention is paid to the game while expecting that the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode. For this reason, even in a state where the specified number of times of the high probability mode is exceeded, the player's willingness to play can be promoted and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  That is, in the case of a configuration in which the low-probability mode hold notification symbol and the high-probability mode hold non-notification symbol are not interchanged, the player displays the hold symbol for the specified number of times in the high probability mode. There is a tendency to stop game ball launch and watch the game. On the other hand, when configured so that the low-probability mode hold notification symbol and the high probability mode hold non-notification symbol are interchanged as in this embodiment, the player holds the specified number of high-probability mode hold times. Even after the symbols are displayed, if all of the reserved symbols in the high probability mode are the reserved non-notifying symbols, the game is continued in expectation that the reserved notification symbols are displayed in the low probability mode. And when the hold notification symbol is displayed in the low probability mode, the player's attention is paid to the player while expecting that the hold notification symbol is displayed in place of the hold non-notification symbol in the high probability mode. This will lead to the promotion of gaming and will increase the interest in gaming.

  In addition, in a gaming machine in which the low-probability mode hold symbol and the high-probability mode hold symbol are not interchanged, if both the low-probability mode hold symbol and the high-probability mode hold symbol are displayed, the low When the hold notification symbol won in the hold notification lottery is displayed as the hold symbol in the probability mode, there is a possibility of giving the player a feeling of loss or disgust as in the high probability mode. For this reason, in gaming machines in which the low-probability mode hold symbol and the high-probability mode hold symbol are not interchanged, that is, in conventional pachinko machines, the high-probability mode hold symbol and the low-probability mode hold symbol Are displayed together, the so-called prohibition process is executed, and the reserved symbol in the low probability mode is always set as the reserved non-notifying symbol.

  However, in such a pachinko machine, when the transition from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode is effected (the display mode of the reserved symbols), the player moves from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. There is a possibility that you will get tired of the game at an early stage as well as not paying attention to the production of.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the prohibition process by making the high-probability mode hold non-notification symbol and the low-probability mode hold notification symbol interchange. It is possible to diversify the display mode when both the high probability mode holding symbol and the low probability mode holding symbol are displayed, and the player can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

(Modification of the fourth embodiment)
A modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. For example, when the remaining number of times in the high probability mode is 7 to 1, that is, in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, the reserved symbols relating to the lottery game in the high probability mode When the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed together, the following configuration may be used. That is, the voice-side MPU 152 does not perform the first hold notification lottery process in step 2203 in the hold command handling process (FIG. 39) or makes it difficult to win the hold notification lottery, and the high probability mode is set. When a notification non-winning flag is stored in the sub-reservation area RC # as a holding symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode immediately after the end, a hold notification command is output regardless of whether or not it is a reach. To do. When the hold notification command is output in this way, the operation notification command is always output in the operation notification lottery process (FIG. 42), and the replacement command is always output in the replacement process (FIG. 43). Also good.
According to this, in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed together. In this case, the hold notification symbol regarding the low probability mode and the hold non-notification symbol regarding the high probability mode are easily interchanged. For this reason, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the low-probability mode hold notification symbol. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be further improved, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, when all the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed, that is, in this embodiment, the number of high probability games is set to 100, so the 100th reserved symbol in the high probability mode is displayed. In such a case, in the opening determination of the electric utility item 63 in the ordinary power transmission control process (S216), the opening may not be won or it may be difficult to win. That is, when all the reserved symbols related to the lottery game in the high probability mode are displayed, the electric accessory 63 may not be released (extended release). Even in such a configuration, when the hold notification symbol is displayed on the hold symbol in the low probability mode, the hit notification result in the high probability mode is replaced by the hold notification symbol in the high probability mode. Can be detected at an early stage, so that it is easy for the player to continue the game even after all the symbols in the high probability mode are displayed.

  Furthermore, as described with reference to FIG. 55 in the modification of the first embodiment, the hold notification symbol is replaced with the adjacent hold non-notification symbol, and the hold notification symbol in the low probability mode is the hold signal in the high probability mode. You may make it add the effect of whether it alert | reports as a symbol. According to this, when a hold notification symbol is displayed in the low probability mode, the player also pays attention to a movement (replacement) such as whether or not the hold notification symbol is notified as a hold symbol in the high probability mode. Therefore, the player's interest in games can be further improved.

  In addition, in the high probability mode, “Δ” different from “●” may be displayed as a hold notification pattern that allows the player to detect in advance that a winning result may occur. . In this case, it may be determined that a winning result is obtained when the hold notification symbol “Δ” is replaced, and the replacement process (FIG. 43) may be performed even in the high probability mode.

  Furthermore, as an example in which a player can easily determine a reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and a reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode, the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the low probability mode You may make it change the basic shape with the holding | maintenance symbol regarding a lottery game. For example, “◯” may be displayed as a basic reserved symbol in the low probability mode, and “Δ” may be displayed as a basic reserved symbol in the high probability mode.

(Fifth embodiment)
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hold notification symbols are used as compared to the first embodiment. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the reserved symbol in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, basically, “◯” is displayed as a reserved symbol related to the first and second lottery games. In addition, “●” and “◎” are displayed as reserved symbols that allow the player to detect in advance that a reach result or a hit result may occur. In addition, the probability that the winning result is higher in the game times related to the reserved symbol is higher when the reserved symbol “保留” is displayed than when the reserved symbol “●” is displayed. That is, the player pays attention to the game while the expectation of the winning result is higher when the reserved symbol “「 ”is displayed than when the reserved symbol“ ● ”is displayed. In the following, the reserved symbol “○” is the reserved non-notifying symbol (first destination notification), the holding symbol “◎” is the first holding notification symbol (second higher-level destination notification), and the holding symbol “●” is the second holding symbol. This will be described as a notification symbol (second lower-order destination notification).

  Next, the configuration of the voice side ROM 153 and the voice side RAM 154 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the voice ROM 153 is provided with a sorting lottery table storage area 153f in addition to the various areas 153a to 153d. In addition to the various areas 154a to 154h, the voice RAM 154 is provided with a distribution lottery counter area 154j.

  Next, the configuration of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b, instead of the miss notification winning flag storage area 213 in the first embodiment, a first miss notification winning flag storage area 213a and a second miss A notification winning flag storage area 213b is provided.
The first losing notification winning flag storage area 213a is an area in which the first losing notification winning flag storage area 213b does not win the winning lottery but stores the first losing notification winning flag when winning the first hold notification. Is an area in which a second off-notification winning flag is stored when winning the second hold notification but not winning the winning lottery.

  Next, the pending command handling process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the pending command handling process. This process is basically the same process as the hold command response process described with reference to FIG. 39, and when the notification win is selected for the hold command response process described with reference to FIG. 39 (S2208: YES), It is the process which added the distribution process (S2212-S2216) of a holding | maintenance alerting symbol.

  Specifically, if it is determined that there is notification winning information (S2208: YES), it is determined whether or not it is a hit correspondence pending command (S2212). If it is determined that the command is a winning correspondence pending command (S2212: YES), the first sorting lottery process is executed (S2213). On the other hand, when it is determined that the command is not a hit-response hold command (S2212: NO), it is determined whether the command is a miss-reach correspondence hold command (S2214). S2214: YES), the second distribution lottery process is executed (S2215).

  In the first and second distribution lottery processes, first, the value of the distribution lottery counter is read from the distribution lottery counter area 154j provided in the voice side RAM 154. Here, the distribution lottery counter is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”. For example, 1 is added at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and the maximum value is reached. The configuration is initialized to 0 later. In the first and second distribution lottery processes, the distribution lottery table stored in the distribution lottery table storage area 153f of the voice-side ROM 153 is referred to, and the read counter value is the first hold notification symbol. Determine whether or not you have won. The probability of winning the first hold notification symbol is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, in the first sorting lottery process (in the case of a hit correspondence hold command), the first hold notification symbol has a probability of 9/10. The sorting lottery table is set so that the winners are won. In the second distribution lottery process (in the case of a hold command corresponding to outreach), the distribution lottery table is set so that the first hold notification symbol is won with a probability of 1/10. That is, the first hold notification symbol is more easily displayed as the hold notification symbol in the case of the hit-response hold command than in the case of the miss reach reach-hold command.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the first hold notification is won (S2216). If it is determined that the first hold notification is won (S2216: YES), the first hold notification command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 162. (S2209a). On the other hand, when it is determined that the first hold notification is not won (S2216: NO), and when it is determined that the hold command is not an outreach correspondence hold command (S2214: NO), the second hold notification command is sent to the display side MPU 162. Transmit (S2209b). Thereafter, the information stored in step 2205 and step 2206 in FIG. 76, the information stored in step 2205 in FIG. 76, step 2305 in FIG. 41, in the secondary reservation area RC # corresponding to the total number of reservations INx added by 1 in step 2201 in the secondary special symbol storage ball storage area 154b. After storing various flags corresponding to the information stored in step 2306 and the determination results in steps 2214 and 2216 (S2211), the pending command handling process is terminated. In the processing of step 2211, the difference from the first embodiment will be described. When the processing of step 2205 is executed, the winning notification winning flag is stored regardless of the determination result of step 2216. Also, if it is determined in step 2214 that the command is not a detach reach hold command and if it is determined in step 2214 that it is a detach reach support hold command, but in step 2216 it is determined that the first hold notification is not won. A second outage notification winning flag is stored. If it is determined in step 2214 that the command is a detach reach hold command and it is determined in step 2216 that the first hold notification is won, a first detach notification winning flag is stored.

  Thereby, in the symbol display device 80, the first hold notification symbol “「 ”is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * corresponding to the sub-holding area RC # in which the first loss notification winning flag is stored, and the second loss The second hold notification symbol “◯” is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds * corresponding to the sub-hold area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored.

  Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) performed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described. The replacement process is basically the same process as the replacement process described with reference to FIG. The difference from the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43 will be described. When a replacement command is transmitted (S2505), when only the first outage notification winning flag is stored as replacement source information, the first Information corresponding to the smallest number of the subordinate holding area RC # in which the miss notification winning flag is stored is transmitted. Further, when only the second outage notification winning flag is stored as the replacement source information, the information corresponding to the smallest number of the sub-holding area RC # in which the second outage notification winning flag is stored is transmitted. . When the first outage notification winning flag and the second outage notification winning flag are stored as the replacement source information, the secondary hold area RC # and the second outage are stored in which the first outage notification winning flag is stored. Information corresponding to the smallest number in the sub-holding area RC # in which the notification winning flag is stored is transmitted.

  Next, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 will be described. The display-side MPU 162 executes the above-described processing when receiving each command, and executes the replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806) when receiving the replacement command. For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the lottery is won for the second reserved symbol display area Ds2, but the reserved non-notification symbol “O” that is not won for the pending notification lottery is displayed, and the fifth reserved symbol is displayed. Although the lottery is won for the display area Ds5, the second hold notification symbol “●” won for the hold notification lottery is displayed and the lottery is won for the seventh hold symbol display area Ds7, but the first lottery for the hold notification lottery is won. The hold notification symbol “◎” is displayed, and the first, third, fourth, sixth, and eighth hold symbol display areas Ds1, Ds3, Ds4, Ds6, and Ds8 are not won. It is assumed that the pending non-notification symbol “◯” that has not been displayed is displayed.

  Here, the problem when a plurality of hold notification symbols are displayed in this way will be described. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when a plurality of on-hold notification symbols are displayed, the first on-hold notification symbol with a high expectation that a hit result will occur in the first to eighth on-hold symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. There is a case where “◎” and the second hold notification symbol “●” with a low expectation level where a winning result is generated are displayed at the same time. In this case, generally, a player has a plurality of points between a first hold notification symbol “◎” with a high expectation level where a winning result is generated and a second hold notification symbol “●” with a low expectation level where a win result is generated. Tendencies to watch game results with a certain degree of expectation even in the game times related to the second hold notification symbol “●” with a low expectation level in which a winning result is generated when the hold non-notification symbol “○” is displayed It is in. However, in general, when a first hold notification symbol “」 ”with a high expectation level where a hit result is generated is displayed immediately after a second hold notification symbol“ ● ”with a low expectation level at which a win result is generated, the player is displayed. In addition to the tendency to lose interest in the game times related to the second hold notification symbol “●” with low expectation level where a winning result is generated, the first hold notification symbol “◎” with high expectation level where a hit result is likely to occur early There is a tendency to desire to move to game times. For this reason, there is a possibility that the interest in the first and second reserved notification symbols cannot be fully enjoyed. That is, if the degree of reliability in the hold notification symbol is accurately notified too much, there is a possibility that the interest in the hold notification symbol cannot be fully enjoyed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the first hold notification symbol “報 知” with a high expectation level where a winning result is generated and the second hold notification symbol “●” with a low expectation level where a hit result is generated are not displayed simultaneously. However, if one hold notification symbol is displayed and the other hold notification symbol is not displayed, the subsequent hold symbol when the hold notification symbol is displayed is always a hold non-notification symbol, and the hold notification is displayed. In the first place, the meaning of letting a player expect a result to be generated with a symbol is diminished.

  Furthermore, when there are a plurality of hold notification symbols that allow the player to detect in advance that a reach result or a hit result may occur, the hold symbols shift the first to eighth symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. When, for example, the holding notification symbol with a low expectation level where a winning result is generated is changed to a holding notification symbol with a high expectation level where a winning result is generated (for example, from the second holding notification symbol “●” to the first holding notification symbol) It is changed to “◎”). However, in this configuration, a hold notification symbol with a low expectation level that is a hit result is frequently generated to change to a hold notification symbol with a high expectation level where a hit result is generated, and a hold notification with a low expectation level where a hit result is generated The frequent appearance of the symbols further diminishes the interest in the game times with respect to the hold notification symbols with low expectation level.

  As described above, there are various problems when displaying a plurality of hold notification symbols with different expectations that the winning result is generated as a hold symbol, but in this embodiment, the hold notification symbol may be replaced by performing a replacement process. By making it exist, the above problems can be solved.

  Specifically, if the replacement command is received in the state of FIG. 77 (a), the replacement command includes information for exchanging the reserved symbols in the second reserved symbol display area Ds2 and the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5. It is. For this reason, when the replacement setting process is executed in the display side MPU 162, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the second hold notification symbol “●” is displayed in the second hold symbol display area Ds2, and the fifth The hold non-notification symbol “◯” is displayed in the hold symbol display area Ds5. In the present embodiment, when the hold notification symbol is switched, it is determined that a winning result is obtained at the replaced game number. For this reason, the player can continue the game in the hope that it will be replaced even if the second on-hold notification symbol “●” is displayed, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, even if it is the second hold notification symbol with low expectation that the winning result is generated, the winning lottery is won, but it may be replaced with the hold non-notifying symbol that was not won in the hold notification lottery ( Fig. 77). Therefore, even if the first hold notification symbol and the second hold notification symbol are displayed at the same time, the player can continue the game while expecting that the second hold notification symbol is replaced with another hold non-notification symbol. . Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, regarding the first on-hold notification symbol with a high expectation level in which a winning result is generated, even if it is not replaced with the on-hold non-informing symbol, the expectation level that the hit result is generated is high, so that attention to the game can be maintained as it is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first hold notification symbol is displayed only when winning the winning lottery or when winning the reach lottery (FIG. 76, S2213, S2215). For this reason, although the first hold notification symbol is displayed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of incongruity that the reach result does not occur in the game times related to the first hold notification symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the winning lottery is won, the second hold notification symbol may be displayed (FIG. 76, S2213). For this reason, even if the second hold notification symbol does not replace the hold non-notification symbol, a winning result may occur in the game times related to the second hold notification symbol, so the second hold notification symbol that has not been replaced. It can suppress that a player's interest falls in the game times regarding.

(Modification of the fifth embodiment)
A modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. For example, when a replacement command is transmitted (FIG. 43, S2505), when the first outage notification winning flag and the second outage notification winning flag are stored, the subordinate hold in which the first outage notification winning flag is stored Information corresponding to the smallest number of the area RC # may be transmitted, or information corresponding to the smallest number of the subordinate holding area RC # in which the second out-of-call notification winning flag is stored may be transmitted. Alternatively, it may be determined by executing a predetermined lottery.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which employ | adopts a some hold notification symbol further, and a hit expectation degree differs with each hold notification symbol. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the hold notification symbol by changing the hold notification symbol having the lowest expectation level.

  Furthermore, the hold notification symbol to be replaced may be configured only by the second hold notification symbol. According to this, since the player continues the game while expecting the second hold notification symbol to be replaced when the second hold notification symbol is displayed, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. In the case of such a configuration, as in the fifth embodiment, even if it is a winning result, if the second hold notification symbol is sometimes displayed, the second is not replaced. Since there may be a winning result in the game times related to the hold notification symbol, even if the second hold notification symbol is not replaced, it is possible to suppress the player from losing interest in the game times related to the second hold notification symbol. .

  Further, the first hold notification symbol and the second hold notification symbol may be interchanged. In this way, by allowing the hold notification symbols to be interchanged, it is possible to further diversify the game. In this case, when both the first hold notification symbol and the second hold notification symbol are displayed, for example, the first hold notification symbol does not win the winning lottery, and the second hold notification symbol wins the winning lottery. In such a case, the first hold notification symbol and the second hold notification symbol may be switched.

  In the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 41), in the second and third hold notification lottery processes (S2302 and S2303), the slave 1st to 8th hold areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol hold ball storage area 154b. When the hit notification non-winning flag is stored and the first and second off notification winning flags are not stored, the outage notification is more effective than the case where the first and second off notification winning flags are stored. The probability of becoming higher may be increased. Similarly, in the operation effective lottery process (FIG. 42), when the winning notification non-winning flag is stored and one of the first and second off notification non-winning flags is stored, the operation notification lottery process (S2404), the probability of an operation notification may be made higher than when these flags are not stored. According to this, when the hit notification non-winning flag is stored, the first hold notification symbol or the second hold notification symbol is likely to be generated, and the hold notification symbol is easily replaced. For this reason, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the hold notification symbol. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

(Sixth embodiment)
A sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, a character symbol is displayed as a hold notification symbol with respect to the first embodiment, and a predetermined effect display is executed in the game times related to the character symbol. Since other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted here.

  First, the display mode of the symbol display device 80 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. 78 and 79 are diagrams for explaining a display mode of the symbol display device 80. FIG.

  In the present embodiment, basically, “◯” is displayed as a reserved symbol related to the first and second lottery games. In addition, a boy's character design is displayed as a reserved design that allows the player to detect in advance that a winning result may occur. For example, as shown in FIG. 78A, a boy character symbol is displayed as a reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3. In this case, in the game times related to the boy character design, unlike the normal performance, the boy character design is displayed in the center of the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, as shown in FIG. 78 (b). At the same time, an enemy character symbol is displayed, and an effect (special effect) in which the boy character symbol and the enemy character symbol confront each other is displayed. When a winning result occurs (when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode), an effect (advantageous content) in which the boy character symbol wins the enemy character symbol is displayed. On the other hand, when the winning result does not occur, an effect (non-advantageous content) is displayed in which the character design of the boy is defeated by the enemy character design. At this time, the special symbol variation display is displayed small on the lower right side of the upper display area Dm in front view (in FIG. 78 (b), the arrow indicates the special symbol variation display). Thereby, the player can also confirm that the special symbol is variably displayed while paying attention to the effect in which the boy character symbol and the enemy character symbol confront each other.

  When a boy character symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds *, the two reserved symbol display areas Ds * after the boy character symbol are displayed as a support zone (special area) EZ. For example, in FIG. 78 (a), since a boy's character symbol is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3, the fourth and fifth reserved symbol display areas Ds4 and Ds5 are displayed as assistance zones. Further, the display of the support zone is shifted simultaneously when the reserved symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds * are shifted to the lower area side. That is, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), when the game display effect relating to the boy character symbol is displayed on the symbol display device 80, the first and second reserved symbol display areas Ds 1 and Ds 2 are supported. Displayed as zone EZ. In addition, when a boy character symbol is displayed in the eighth reserved symbol display area Ds8, the support zone EZ is displayed when the boy character symbol is shifted to the lower area side.

  Furthermore, when the boy character symbol is displayed, the girl character symbol may be displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds * after the support zone EZ as shown in FIG. 79 (a). This girl character symbol is displayed as a symbol that may support the boy character symbol when displayed in the support zone EZ. That is, when the girl character symbol is replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ as shown in FIG. 79 (b) from the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), as shown in FIG. The effect that this character design confronts the enemy character design together with the boy character design is displayed. If the character design of the girl is not replaced with the reserved design in the support zone EZ, in the upper display area Dm of the design display device 80, only the boy character design is used in the game times related to the boy character design. The effect which fights a symbol is displayed, and a normal effect is displayed in the game times regarding a character design of a girl.

  By adopting such a display mode, the player continues the game while expecting that the character design of the girl is displayed when the character design of the boy is displayed, and the character design of the girl is displayed. In such a case, attention is paid to the game while expecting that the character design of the girl falls within the support zone EZ. For this reason, a player's interest in a game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the lower display area Ds is provided with an execution reserved symbol display area Ds0 in addition to the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. The execution reserved symbol display area Ds0 is an area indicating a reserved symbol related to the fluctuation of the symbol display device 80. For example, as described above, when the game time is related to the boy character design, and the effect that the boy character design confronts the enemy character design is displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, the execution is suspended. The boy character symbol is displayed in the symbol display area Ds0 (see FIG. 78B).

  Hereinafter, the reserved symbol “◯” will be described as the reserved non-notification symbol (first destination notification) as the reserved symbol. In addition, the boy character symbol is also referred to as a first hold notification symbol (second destination notification), and the girl character symbol is also referred to as a second reservation notification symbol (third destination notification).

  Next, the structure for implementing the display mode displayed on the symbol display device 80 will be described.

  First, the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b provided in the voice side RAM 154 will be described. The secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b is the same as the configuration described with reference to FIG. 74 (fifth embodiment), but the first miss notification winning flag storage area 213a is not won in the winning lottery described later. Is the area where the first miss notification winning flag is stored when the second hold notification lottery is won, and the second miss notification winning flag storage area 213b is not won in the winning lottery described later, but is in the third hold alert lottery. This is the area where the second off-notification winning flag is stored when winning.

  Further, the detailed special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b of this embodiment will be described in detail. The winning notification winning flag storage area 211 wins the winning lottery and wins the reserved notification lottery (a boy character symbol is displayed). The notification winning flag is stored. The winning notification non-winning flag storage area 212 is an area in which a winning notification non-winning flag is stored when the winning lottery is won but the winning notification lottery is not won (when the holding non-notifying symbol is displayed). The first losing notification winning flag storage area 213a does not win the winning lottery but stores the first losing notification winning flag when the second hold notification lottery is won (when the boy character symbol is displayed). It is. The second off notification winning flag storage area 213b does not win the winning lottery but stores the second out notification winning flag when the third hold notification lottery is won (when the girl character symbol is displayed). It is. The off-notification non-winning flag storage area 214 is an area in which the off-notification non-winning flag is stored when the winning lottery is not won and the on-hold notification lottery is not won (when the on-hold non-notifying symbol is displayed). is there.

  Next, the pending command handling process (FIG. 37, S2013) executed by the voice MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the pending command handling process. This process is basically the same process as the hold command response process described with reference to FIG. 39, and the boy character design is mainly displayed for the hold command response process described with reference to FIG. This is a process for executing the process (S2218, S2203) as to whether or not to display the character design of the boy after determining whether or not it is present.

  Specifically, first, the information in the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b is read (S2217). Then, after adding 1 to the total number of holdings INx (S2201), one of INx-1 and INx-2 (INx is the total number of holdings added by 1 in step 2201) in the secondary special symbol holding ball storage area 154b. It is determined whether the notification winning flag or the first off notification winning flag is stored for the corresponding sub-reservation area RC # (S2218). That is, for example, when the total number of holdings INx added by 1 in step 2201 is 4, whether or not a notification winning flag or a first outage notification winning flag is stored in the secondary and secondary holding areas RC2 and RC3. Determine whether. In other words, when the hold symbol corresponding to the hold command is displayed in the fourth hold symbol display area Ds4, the boy character symbol is displayed in one of the second and third hold symbol display areas Ds2 and Ds3. It is determined whether or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the holding symbol corresponding to the holding command is displayed in the support zone EZ.

  Then, after determining whether the hit notification winning flag or the first missed notification winning flag is stored in the sub-holding area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 in step 2218, the hit corresponding hold command is used. It is determined whether or not there is (S2202a, S2202b). Neither the notification winning flag nor the first off notification winning flag is stored in any of the sub-reserved areas RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 (S2218: NO), but it is a hit-response pending command If it is determined (S2202a: YES), a first hold notification lottery process (S2203) is executed to determine whether or not to display the boy's character symbol as a hold symbol. The first hold notification lottery process is the same process as the first hold notification lottery process described in the first embodiment, but in this embodiment, the hold notification lottery is performed so that the information is won with a probability of 1/4. A table is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the first hold notification lottery process is notification winning (S2204). If it is determined that the notification is won (S2204: YES), the winning notification winning information is stored (S2205). If it is determined that the notification is not winning (S2204: NO), the winning notification non-winning information is stored. Store (S2206).

  Further, when it is determined that neither the hitting notification winning flag or the first off-calling notification winning flag is stored in the sub-holding area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2, and it is not a hit-response pending command (S2202a: NO) ), Pseudo hold notification lottery processing is executed (S2207).

  Here, the pseudo hold notification lottery process (S2207) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the pseudo hold notification lottery process. This process is basically the same process as the pseudo hold notification lottery process described with reference to FIG. 41, and the character design is mainly displayed with respect to the pseudo hold notification lottery process described with reference to FIG. This is a process for executing the process (S2310, S2302, S2303) as to whether or not to display the character design.

  In the pseudo hold notification lottery process, first, based on the information read in step 2217 in the hold command response process (FIG. 81), the winning notification winning flag in the slave first to slave eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8 or the first miss It is determined whether or not at least one notification winning flag is stored (S2310). That is, in step 2218 of the hold command response process (FIG. 81), it is determined that the notification winning flag or the first outage notification winning flag is not stored in the secondary hold area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the winning notification winning flag or the first outage notification winning flag is stored in at least one of the other dependent reserved areas (secondary reserved areas before INx-3) RC #. . That is, it is determined whether or not a boy character design is displayed.

  When it is determined that none of the winning notification winning flag or the first losing notification winning flag is stored (S2310: NO), it is determined whether or not it is a detach reach hold command (S2301). If it is determined that the command is a corresponding hold command (S2301: YES), a second hold notification lottery process for determining whether or not to display the boy's character symbol is executed (S2302). This second hold notification lottery process is basically the same process as the second hold notification lottery process, but in this embodiment, the hold notification lottery table is set so that the notification is won with a probability of 1/20. Is set. If it is determined that the second hold notification lottery is won (S2304a: YES), the first off notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice MPU 152 (S2305a).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning notification winning flag or the first missed notification winning flag is stored (S2310: YES), it is determined whether the second missed notification winning flag is stored (S2311). . That is, when the boy character symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds *, it is determined whether or not the girl character symbol is already displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds *.

  If it is determined that the second outage notification winning flag is not stored (S2311: NO), a third on-hold notification lottery process for lottery of whether or not to display the character design of the girl is executed (S2303). This third hold notification lottery process is basically the same process as the third hold notification lottery process, but in this embodiment, the hold notification lottery table is set so that the notification win is achieved with a probability of 1/4. Is set. If it is determined that the third hold notification lottery is won (S2304b: YES), the second off notification winning information is stored in the register of the voice MPU 152 (S2305b).

  When it is determined that the winning notification winning flag or the first missed notification winning flag is not stored and is not a missed reach corresponding hold command (S2301: NO), the winning alert winning flag or the first missed notification winning flag is stored. However, if it is determined that the second outage notification winning flag is already stored (S2311: YES), the outage notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the voice MPU 152 (S2306). In other words, when the boy character symbol is not displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the boy character symbol is displayed only when the reach result is generated. When displayed, a plurality of character designs of girls are not displayed. Further, when it is determined that the second hold notification has not been won (S2304a: NO) and when it is determined that the third hold notification lottery has not been won (S2304b: NO), the voice side MPU 152 is registered. The miss notification non-winning information is stored (S2306).

  Returning to the description of the pending command handling process (FIG. 81), the notification winning flag or the first off notification winning flag is stored in the secondary holding area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 (S2218: YES). If it is determined that the command is a hit correspondence hold command (S2202b: YES), the hit notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the voice MPU 152 (S2206). On the other hand, when the hit notification winning flag or the first missed notification winning flag is stored in the sub-reserved area RC # corresponding to INx-1 and INx-2 (S2218: YES), but it is determined that it is not a hit corresponding hold command (S2202b: NO), the notification non-winning information is stored in the register of the voice MPU 152 (S2219). That is, when the holding symbol corresponding to the holding command is displayed in the support zone EZ of the symbol display device 80, the lottery for holding notification is not performed.

  After executing the processing of Step 2205, Step 2206, Step 2219 of FIG. 81, Step 2305a, Step 2305b, and Step 2306 of FIG. It is determined whether there is information (S2208a). If it is determined that there is winning notification winning information or first off notification winning information (S2208a: YES), a first hold notification command is transmitted (S2209a). If it is determined that there is no winning notification winning information or first failure notification winning information (S2208a: NO), it is determined whether there is second failure notification winning information (S2208b), and the second failure notification winning information is determined. If it is determined that there is (S2208b: YES), a second hold notification command is transmitted (S2209b). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no second outage notification winning information (S2208b: NO), a hold non-notification command is transmitted (S2210). Subsequently, in the secondary reservation area RC # corresponding to the total reservation number INx obtained by adding 1 in step 2201 in the secondary special symbol storage ball storage area 154b, step 2205, step 2206, step 2219 in FIG. 81, step 2305a in FIG. Various flags corresponding to the information stored in steps 2305b and 2306 are stored (S2211), and then the pending command handling process is terminated. In the processing of step 2211, the difference from the first embodiment will be described. If it is determined in step 2208a that there is first losing notification winning information, the first losing notification winning flag is stored. If it is determined in step 2208b that there is second outage notification winning information, a second outage notification winning flag is stored.

  When receiving the first hold notification command, the display-side MPU 162 displays the boy character symbol in the hold symbol display area Ds *, and when receiving the second hold notification command, the display character MPU 162 displays the girl character symbol in the hold symbol display area Ds *. When the hold non-notification command is displayed, a process of displaying the hold non-notification symbol in the hold symbol display area Ds * is executed (FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 79 (a)). Further, when the display side MPU 162 receives the first hold notification command, the display side MPU 162 displays the two areas behind the hold symbol display area Ds * in which the character design of the boy corresponding to the first hold notification command is displayed as the support zone EZ. Processing is executed (FIGS. 78 and 79).

  Next, the replacement process (FIG. 36, S1910) executed by the audio side MPU 152 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the replacement process. This process is basically the same process as the replacement process described above with reference to FIG. 43, and the girl character design replacement process (S2509 to S2514) is illustrated with respect to the replacement process described with reference to FIG. 43 is replaced with step 2502 to step 2504. In the present embodiment, although not particularly shown, the operation valid lottery process in step 2007 in the main-side command handling process (FIG. 37) is not performed, and the operation valid in steps 1907 to 1909 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36). It is configured not to perform the determination process whether or not it is during the period. That is, this replacement process is performed immediately after the timer update process in step 1906 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 36).

  In the replacement process, after reading the information of the slave special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b (S2501), the second out of the slave first to slave eighth reserve areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol reserve ball storage area 154b. It is determined whether or not a notification winning flag is stored. If a second out-of-call notification winning flag is stored, it is determined whether or not a replacement flag is stored in the sub-reserved area RC # (S2509). ). Incidentally, the case where the second off-notification winning flag is stored and the replacement flag is not stored is shown in FIG. 79 (a), in which both the character design of the boy and the character design of the girl are included. In the displayed state, the girl character symbol is not replaced with another reserved symbol. The replacement flag is stored in the process of step 2506 described later.

  When it is determined that the second outage notification winning flag is stored and the replacement completed flag is not stored (S2509: YES), the winning notification winning in the sub first to sub eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8 is made. It is determined whether or not a flag is stored (S2510). That is, since the boy character symbol is displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, whether or not the game times related to the reserved symbol on which the boy character symbol is displayed is a hit result. Determine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second out-of-call notification winning flag is stored but the replacement flag is also stored (S2509: NO), the replacement processing is terminated as it is. In addition, also when it determines with the 2nd off notification winning flag not being stored, this replacement | exchange process is complete | finished as it is.

  If it is determined that the winning notification winning flag is stored (S2510: YES), a first replacement command is transmitted (S2505a). Specifically, in this process, assuming that the smallest number of the sub-holding area RC # in which the winning notification winning flag is stored is INa, information on the number of INa + 1 or INa + 2 and the holding symbol for the number are displayed. Along with information on the girl's character symbol (second hold notification symbol), information on the number regarding the secondary hold area RC # in which the second off-call notification winning flag is stored, and the hold symbol corresponding to the number as the hold non-notification symbol A first replacement command including information is transmitted. That is, the command which replaces a girl's character symbol with the reserved symbol in the assistance zone EZ is transmitted. Note that one of the information regarding the number of INa + 1 or INa + 2 to be replaced is selected by lottery or the like.

  If it is determined that the winning notification winning flag is not stored (S2510: NO), the secondary reserved area RC # corresponding to the reserved symbol display area Ds * on which the boy's character symbol is displayed is the first off. The notification winning flag is stored. Therefore, whether the notification non-winning flag is stored for INb + 1 or INb + 2 sub-holding area RC #, where INb is the smallest number of the sub-holding area RC # in which the first outage notification winning flag is stored Is determined (S2511). That is, when a boy character symbol is displayed as a reserved symbol in the reserved symbol display area Ds *, two reserved symbol display areas Ds * after the reserved symbol display area Ds * are set as the support zone EZ. Therefore, it is determined whether or not a pending non-notification symbol that causes a winning result is displayed in the support zone EZ.

  If it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag is stored (S2511: YES), a second replacement command is transmitted (S2505b). Specifically, in this process, the information about the smallest number in the sub-reserved area RC # in which the winning notification non-winning flag is stored, and the reserved symbol for the number are used as the girl character symbol (second reserved notification symbol). In addition to the information to be transmitted, a second replacement command is transmitted that includes information on the number related to the secondary reserved area RC # in which the second out-of-call notification winning flag is stored, and information that sets the reserved symbol corresponding to the number as the reserved non-notifying symbol. That is, a second replacement command is transmitted to replace the girl character symbol with the reserved symbol that generates a hit result in the support zone EZ.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning notification non-winning flag is not stored (S2511: NO), it is determined whether or not replacement is possible (S2512). That is, it is determined whether or not there is an outage notification non-winning flag stored in the sub-holding area RC # corresponding to the holding symbol after the assistance zone EZ. That is, it is determined whether or not a holding non-notification symbol that does not win the lottery is displayed on the holding symbol display area Ds * after the support zone EZ. If it is determined that replacement is possible (S2512: YES), a replacement lottery process similar to that in step 2503 is executed (2513), and it is determined whether or not it is a replacement winning (S2514).

  If it is determined that it is a replacement winning (S2514: YES), a third replacement command is transmitted (S2505c). Specifically, in this process, in the symbol display device 80, information regarding the number to be replaced and the reserved symbol for the number are used as the second reserved notification symbol so that the girl character symbol does not enter the support zone EZ. In addition to the information to be transmitted, a third replacement command is transmitted that includes information on the number related to the sub-holding area RC # in which the second out-of-call notification winning flag is stored, and information that sets the reserved symbol for the number as the reserved non-notifying symbol. That is, in the third replacement command, the number of the subordinate holding area RC # as the receiving destination is appropriately determined by lottery so as not to enter the support zone EZ.

  After the processing of step 2505a to step 2505c is completed, the information in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b is updated based on the first to third replacement commands in the same manner as in step 2506 (S2506). Specifically, in the sub-reservation area RC # to be replaced, the already stored flag is deleted, the winning notification winning flag or the second miss notification winning flag is stored, and the replacement flag is further stored. . Further, in the sub-holding area RC # in which the second outage notification winning flag is stored, the second outage notification winning flag is deleted and the outage notification non-winning flag is stored. When the process of step 2506 is completed, when it is determined that the replacement is not possible (S2512: NO), or when it is determined that the replacement is not successful (S2514: NO), the replacement process is terminated.

  When receiving the first to third replacement commands, the display-side MPU 162 executes replacement setting processing (FIG. 46, S2806). In the present embodiment, as described in the modification of the first embodiment, the girl character symbol (second hold notification symbol) is sequentially replaced in one game time or a plurality of game times (see FIG. 55). ). That is, the girl's character design is moved so as to produce an effect such as whether or not the girl's character design enters the support zone EZ, thereby improving the player's attention.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the symbol display device 80, the boy's character symbol (first hold notification symbol) is displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Ds3, and the fourth and fifth reserved symbols are displayed. It is assumed that the areas Ds4 and Ds5 are displayed as the support zone EZ, and the girl character symbol (second reserved notification symbol) is displayed in the seventh reserved symbol display area Ds7.

  In this state, when the character design of the boy wins the lottery, the first replacement command is transmitted from the voice side MPU 152. When receiving the first replacement command, the display-side MPU 162 holds the girl character symbol displayed in the seventh reserved symbol display area Ds7 displayed in the fifth to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds5 to Ds8. Finally, for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), a replacement setting process is performed in which the displayed information is replaced with the reserved non-notifying symbols in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 while being replaced with the non-notifying symbols. That is, the replacement setting process is performed so that the girl character symbol is displayed as the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ. Note that the path through which the girl character symbol is exchanged is the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 and the reserved symbol display area Ds * in which the boy character symbol is displayed. It is preferable to change the number according to the number. Such control is also possible in replacement setting processing when second and third replacement commands described later are received.

  In the game times related to the boy character design, as shown in FIG. 80, the boy character design is displayed in the upper display area Dm, and the girl character design displayed in the support zone EZ is displayed on the upper display. Displayed in the area Dm, an effect in which the boy character design and the girl character design cooperate with the enemy character design is displayed. And the effect which wins by the said effect to confront is displayed, and a winning result is displayed. When a girl character symbol is displayed in the upper display area Dm, a reserved non-notifying symbol is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds * where the girl character symbol is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the character design of the boy is not the winning lottery, but the reserved non-notifying symbol displayed in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5 in the support zone EZ is won. If the lottery is won, a second replacement command is transmitted. When the display side MPU 162 receives the second replacement command, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the display-side MPU 162 converts the girl character symbol to the reserved symbol (the winning lottery in the fifth reserved symbol display area Ds5). The display is performed by exchanging with the winning non-notification symbol to be selected.

  In the game times related to the boy character design, as shown in FIG. 80, the boy character design is displayed in the upper display area Dm, and the girl character design displayed in the support zone EZ is displayed on the upper display. In the area Dm, the boy character design and the girl character design cooperate with the enemy character design, and the game times to win the actual winning lottery are the game times related to the girls reserved symbols. It is. For this reason, the display-side MPU 162 performs display control so that the game times relating to the character design of the boy to the game times relating to the character design of the girl are regarded as one effect.

  In FIG. 80, in the upper display area Dm, an example in which a girl character design is also displayed at the same time as a game time related to a boy character design (effect in which both a boy character design and a girl character design confront an enemy character design). The character design of the girl may be displayed in the middle of the production where the boy character design and the enemy character design are confronted, or after the production of the defeat of the boy character design is displayed. You may make it display as a resurrection character.

  Also, in the game times related to the boy's character design, if the winning lottery is not won, and there is no holding symbol that wins the winning lottery in the support zone EZ, the third replacement command is transmitted or the replacement command is not transmitted. When the display side MPU 162 receives the third replacement command, the display side MPU 162 performs display control so that the girl character symbol is not displayed in the support zone EZ. In this way, although the character design of the girl is replaced, by adding a display effect such as whether or not to enter the support zone EZ, even if the character design of the girl is replaced, it is not determined to enter the support zone EZ. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the effect display by replacing (moving) the character design of the girl. When the replacement command is not received, the girl character design is displayed as it is.

  If a girl character design is displayed but the girl character design is not displayed in the support zone EZ, a normal effect is displayed in the game times related to the girl character design as described above. Is done. For this reason, when the girl character symbol is not displayed as the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ after being replaced with the reserved non-informing symbol, the boy character symbol is confronted with the enemy character symbol. You may make it change into a holding | maintenance non-notification symbol and display it before an effect or after an effect. Further, the display-side MPU 162 ends the support zone display process after the production in which the boy character symbol and the enemy character symbol confront each other.

  According to this embodiment described above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  First, in this embodiment, when the boy character symbol is displayed as the reserved symbol, the support zone EZ is displayed (FIGS. 78 to 80, 84, and 85), and the girl character symbol is displayed in the support zone EZ. A hit result occurs when is displayed. For this reason, when the character design of the boy is displayed, the player first continues the game while expecting that the character design of the girl is displayed as a reserved design, and the character design of the girl is displayed. In this case, the game is continued while expecting that the girl character symbol is replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ. For this reason, a player's interest in a game can be improved.

  In addition, the girl character symbol may be displayed after the boy character symbol is displayed as the reserved symbol, but even if the boy character symbol wins the lottery, it will be displayed in the lottery. (FIG. 82, S2303). In other words, even if only the boy's character design is displayed, a hit result may be obtained. For this reason, even if the character design of the girl is not displayed, the player can pay attention to the game while expecting that a winning result will be generated in the game times related to the character design of the boy.

  Furthermore, since the character design of the girl is moved (replaced) so as to produce an effect such as whether or not it falls within the support zone EZ, the player's attention to the replacement (movement) of the girl can be improved.

(Modification of the sixth embodiment)
A modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. For example, even when the winning lottery regarding the character design of the boy is lost and the winning lottery regarding the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ is also excluded, the character design of the girl may be replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ. May be. According to this, the display of the girl character design in the support zone EZ can be regarded as one effect (so-called game chance-up effect), and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early. In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the production by creating an effect that the character design of the girl may be displayed as a resurrection character after the production of the defeat of the character design of the boy is displayed. be able to.

  Further, in the pseudo hold notification lottery process (FIG. 82), in the third hold notification lottery process (S2303), a notification winning flag is stored in the secondary reserved area RC # of the secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area 154b and the second If the outage notification winning flag is not stored, and the first outage notification winning flag is stored, the second outage notification winning flag is not stored, and the subordinate reserved area RC corresponding to the support zone EZ When the notification non-winning flag is stored in the case of #, the probability of winning the third hold notification lottery process may be increased. In other words, when a winning result occurs in a game time related to a boy's character design, or if a winning result occurs in a game time related to a reserved symbol in the support zone EZ, the character character design of the girl should be displayed easily. Also good. According to this, it becomes easy to generate | occur | produce a girl's character design, and it becomes easy for a player to experience the excitement (expectation) by replacing with the holding | maintenance design of the support zone EZ. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the first girl character design (third destination notification) and the second girl character design (fourth destination notification) are displayed as the reserved symbols, and the first girl is displayed. The expectation that the winning result will change is changed when the character design of the character is replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ and when the character design of the second girl is replaced with the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ. May be. For example, when the second girl's character symbol is displayed on the reserved symbol in the support zone EZ, the expectation that the hit result will be higher than when the first girl character symbol is displayed. It may be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 87 (a), since two reserved symbols are displayed in the support zone EZ, the first girl character symbol is replaced with one of the reserved symbols in the support zone EZ. The character design of the second girl may be replaced with the other reserved design in the support zone EZ. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), the first girl character design and the second girl character design confront each other in the support zone EZ (preliminary special effect). May be displayed so that the winning character symbol and the boy character symbol are confronted with the enemy character symbol, and the winning character symbol may have different expectations. According to this, the player can be made to pay more attention to the reserved symbol display area Ds *.

  After the first girl character design and the second girl character design are confronted, the defeated girl character design may be displayed as it is, or it may be changed to a reserved non-notification design. Also good. When displaying the first girl character symbol and the second girl character symbol, the first girl character symbol (character pattern with low expectation) is displayed in the reserved symbol display area Ds *. After that, it is preferable to display the character design (character design with high expectation) of the second girl. According to this, when the character design of the boy is displayed, even if the character design of the first girl is displayed, the player has the second girl character with a higher expectation result of the hit result. Since the game is continued with the expectation that the symbol is displayed, the player's interest in the game can be further increased.

  Further, the operation effective lottery process (S2007) is performed as in the first to fifth embodiments, and the replacement process is executed when the player operates the first frame button 26 or after the operation effective period has elapsed. It may be.

  Furthermore, without providing the support zone EZ, the production content may be changed according to the interval (positional relationship) between the character design of the boy and the character design of the girl.

(Seventh embodiment)
A seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 43 is changed with respect to each of the above-described embodiments, and the other aspects are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 43 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 88, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 63 is not provided in the upper opening of the sorting and winning device 62.
Further, the normal symbol start gate 57 is provided on the center right side of the game board 43 as viewed from the front. And the 2nd starting port 55-2 is provided in the front view right side of the allocation prize-winning apparatus 62, and the electrically-driven accessory 63 is provided in the 2nd starting port 55-2.

  In such a gaming machine, during the high probability mode (high frequency support mode), it is more advantageous for the player to pass the normal symbol start gate 57 to open the electric accessory 63, so that The game ball is fired so that the game ball passes the right side of the symbol display device 80 (so-called right hit). As a result, the player can continue the game while not reducing the ball. That is, in the present embodiment, the player can maintain the same launch state (right-handed) after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The present invention is also applied to the pachinko machine 10 using such a game board 43.

  By the way, in the above gaming machine, in the high probability mode, the player hits the right hand, so that it is difficult for the game ball to win the distribution winning device 66 (the first start port 54 and the second start port 55-1). For this reason, in such a gaming machine, when shifting from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the player stops launching the game ball when the reserved symbols for the specified number of times in the high probability mode are displayed. The tendency to watch games is particularly strong (see the fourth embodiment).

  However, when the configuration of the fourth embodiment is provided, that is, when both the high probability mode hold symbol and the low probability mode hold symbol are displayed, the hold notification symbol may be displayed in the low probability mode. In addition, there is a possibility that the low-probability mode hold notification symbol and the high-probability mode hold non-notification symbol are displayed interchangeably, thereby displaying the high-probability mode hold symbols for the specified number of times. Immediately after being played, it is possible to prompt the player to fire the game ball so that the game ball wins the distribution winning device 66 (the first start port 54 and the second start port 55-1). That is, even after the reserved symbols for the specified number of times in the high probability mode are displayed, the player can easily continue the game, and the player's willingness to play can be promoted.

(Modification of the seventh embodiment)
A modification of the seventh embodiment will be described. For example, the gaming board 43 of the seventh embodiment may be configured not to include the distribution winning device 63 and not to include the second start port 55-1. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball is likely to win only at the first start opening 54 in the low probability mode, and a game ball is easy to win at the second start opening 55-2 in the high probability mode. In other words, in the low-probability mode, the pachinko machine 10 that does not generate a winning game ball alternately at the first and second start ports 54 and 55 may be used. That is, in the first, second, and fourth to sixth embodiments, game balls are not alternately won at the first and second start ports 54 and 55, and the low probability mode and the high probability mode The pachinko machine 10 may be different in the ease of winning a game ball to the first and second start openings 54 and 55.

  In the case of such a pachinko machine 10, for example, in the lower display area Ds of the symbol display device 80, a reserved symbol related to the first lottery game is displayed on the left side when viewed from the front, and the second symbol is displayed on the right side when viewed from the front. You may make it display the holding | maintenance symbol regarding a lottery game. That is, it is possible to easily distinguish between the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game and the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game by changing the place where the reserved symbol related to the first lottery game and the reserved symbol related to the second lottery game are displayed. It may be.

  Further, in the case of such a pachinko machine 10, the second lottery game (holding information triggered by winning at the second starting port 55-2) is triggered by the first lottery game (winning at the first starting port 54). It is good also as a structure by which priority determination lottery etc. are digested (executed) preferentially over the hold information. That is, in the high probability mode, even if a game ball is won at the first start port 54, if there is a game ball win at the second start port 55-2, the second start port 55 is concerned. It is good also as a structure which preferentially digests the winning / failing lottery or the like triggered by a game ball.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, in the first and second embodiments, since the second lottery game is preferentially executed in the high probability mode, the held symbols related to the second lottery game are easily exchanged. . In other words, it is easy for the symbols on hold with a high probability of a 16R probability variation result that is advantageous to the player to be interchanged. For this reason, for a player, the probability that a 16R probability variation result is low due to the replacement of the hold notification symbol (for example, “●”) and the hold non-notification symbol (for example, “◯”) is low. Thus, the player can enjoy the effect that the hold notification symbol is replaced.

  In addition, by appropriately adjusting the locations of the nails, windmills, and the like provided on the game board 43, a small number of game balls are placed in the first start port 54 when the player makes a right turn in the high probability mode. You may be made to lead to. Then, a hold notification symbol (for example, “●”) is displayed for the first lottery game that is not preferentially digested, and a hold non-notification symbol (for example, “◯” for the second lottery game for which the hold notification symbol is preferentially digested). ") May be replaced. According to this, it is possible to give the player a new game characteristic that the reserved symbol of the lottery game that is preferentially digested and the reserved symbol of the lottery game that is not preferentially digested are exchanged.

(Other embodiments)
It is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. And the structure of another following form may be applied individually with respect to the structure in each said embodiment, and may be applied in combination with each other. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the following other forms with respect to embodiment different from embodiment illustrated as application object.

(A) About the display mode of the symbol display device 80 (1) First example of replacement of reserved symbols In the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, as shown in FIG. Three types of reserved symbols “○”, “△”, and “●” are displayed at random, and when at least one of these reserved symbols is displayed, the reserved symbols are switched to a predetermined combination. Accordingly, the display side MPU 162 (expectation degree notification control means) may display an expectation degree at which a winning result such as “reach” or “celebration (winning)” occurs. Note that the three types of reserved symbols “◯”, “Δ”, and “●” have the same expectation level as a hit result.

  That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 89 (a), three reserved symbols “◯” are displayed. For this reason, in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, “operate the second frame button to arrange three“ ◯ ”and press the first frame button! ! Is displayed, and the cursor key C indicating the first reserved symbol display area Ds1 is displayed. In the present pachinko machine 10, the second frame button 27 is a substantially cross key, so that the player can move the cursor key by operating the left and right keys, and the up and down keys. The reserved symbol can be selected by operating, and this operation is repeated twice to select the two reserved symbols so that the selected reserved symbols are exchanged.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 89 (b), the player can change the first frame after the replacement so that the reserved symbols “O” are displayed side by side in the second to fourth reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4. When the button 26 is operated, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), an effect that the reserved symbol is ruptured is displayed in the second to fourth reserved symbol display areas Ds2 to Ds4, and the game times relating to the ruptured reserved symbol are displayed. The character which suggests the contents of is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 89 (d), when there is a game that wins the reach lottery among game times related to the reserved symbols displayed in the second to fourth reserved symbol display areas Ds 2 to Ds 4, In the center of the screen of the upper display area Dm, “reach” is displayed, and when there is a winning lottery, a character such as “celebration” is displayed. Move characters such as “reach” and “celebration” to be displayed. Then, in the game times related to the reserved symbols that triggered the display of “reach” and “celebration”, an effect using characters such as “reach” and “celebration” is displayed.

  According to this, since the condition that the expectation level of the game times related to the reserved symbols (characters such as reach and congratulations) is displayed when the reserved symbols are rearranged in a predetermined combination, the reserved symbols are made to the player's intention. Unless exchanged accordingly, the player cannot know the expectation level of the game times related to the reserved symbols. For this reason, since the player can actively participate in a new game (directing) called mystery solving (replacement) with his own intention, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since a new game of solving the mystery is given, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

  Note that in the state of FIG. 89 (a), the characters displayed in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80 can be changed as appropriate. For example, “ Press the frame button! ! ”Or“ ○ ”and arrange two reserved symbols“ △ ”and press the first frame button! ! The display according to the reserved symbols displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is preferable.

  Also, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 is not limited to three, and may be two or four or more. And you may make it provide a difference in the expectation degree which becomes a hit result in the hold | maintenance symbol displayed. In other words, if a winning result is found in the corresponding game round, a highly anticipated holding symbol that causes a winning result is displayed, and the subsequent holding symbol is made easier to appear in the holding symbol after that. It may be.

(2) Second Example of Replacement of Held Symbols In the symbol display device 80, when the effect display on the theme of music (music) is performed, “de” “le” “mi” “fa” “So” “La” “Sh” “Do” may be displayed one by one at random. Then, when all the eight reserved symbols are displayed, the reserved symbols may be exchanged.

  That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 90 (a), “do” “re” “mi” “fa” “so” “la” “shi” “do” are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. "Are displayed one by one at random. For this reason, in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, the “second frame button is operated to change the order of“ do ”“ le ”“ mi ”“ fa ”“ so ”“ la ”“ si ”“ do ”. After that, press the first frame button! ! Is displayed, and the cursor key C indicating the first reserved symbol display area Ds1 is displayed. Further, as described in the above (1), the reserved symbols are exchanged by operating the second frame button 27.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), "do" "le" "mi" "fa" "so" "la" "shi" "in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. When the first frame button 26 is operated by the player in a state where the reserved symbols are switched so that “do” is displayed in order, the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas as shown in FIG. 90 (c). An effect that the reserved symbol is ruptured is displayed on Ds1 to Ds8, and characters such as “reach” and “celebration” described in (1) are displayed as shown in FIG. 90 (d). To do.

  According to this, since the replacement operation becomes possible after the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, the player holds in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. The game is continued to display the symbol. For this reason, interest in games can be improved.

(3) Third example of replacement of reserved symbols In the symbol display device 80, when performing display with mahjong as a theme, “east”, “south”, “west” and “north” are randomly selected as reserved symbols. May be displayed two by two.
That is, when all the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, “east”, “south”, “west”, and “north” are displayed two by two in order of separation. May be.
Then, when all the eight reserved symbols are displayed, the reserved symbols may be exchanged.

  That is, for example, in the example of FIG. 91 (a), two “east”, “south”, “west”, and “north” are randomly displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. ing. For this reason, in the upper display area Dm of the symbol display device 80, operate the second frame button to create four toys “East”, “South”, “West”, and “North” and press the first frame button! ! Is displayed, and the cursor key C indicating the first reserved symbol display area Ds1 is displayed. Further, as described in the above (1), the reserved symbols are exchanged by operating the second frame button 27.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b), the first and second reserved symbol display areas Ds1 and Ds2 are “east”, the third and fourth reserved symbol display areas Ds3 and Ds4 are “south”, the fifth, The reserved symbols have been changed so that “west” is displayed in the sixth reserved symbol display areas Ds5 and Ds6, and “north” is displayed in the seventh and eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds7 and Ds8, and a predetermined combination is made. When the player operates the first frame button 26, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), an effect that the reserved symbol is ruptured is displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8. The expectation degree for the hit result regarding the ruptured reserved symbol is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), as the degree of expectation for the winning result of the game times related to the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, “white” “」 ” Any of “medium” (for example, white has the lowest hit expectation degree and medium has the highest hit expectation degree) may be displayed (in FIG. 91D, “medium” is displayed. )

  According to this, since the player continues the game in an attempt to display the reserved symbols in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, when the design display device 80 performs an effect display on the theme of mahjong, “east”, “south”, “west”, “north”, “white”, “「 ”, and“ medium ”are randomly displayed as reserved symbols. One by one may be displayed. That is, when all the reserved symbols are displayed in the first to seventh reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds7, “east”, “south”, “west”, “north”, “white”, “」 ”, and“ middle ”are in order. One by one may be displayed. When all seven reserved symbols are displayed, for example, if the reserved symbols are replaced in the order of “east”, “south”, “west”, “north”, “white”, “發”, “middle”, FIG. 89 (d). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 90D, characters such as “reach” and “celebration” may be displayed.

(4) Other examples of replacement of reserved symbols In addition to the above (1) to (3), if the reserved symbols in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are replaced to form a predetermined combination Any of the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to D8 may be used. For example, numerals, characters, symbols, characters, and the like may be displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8, and the combination contents can be changed as appropriate. In this case, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 are related to the subject of the effect display in the symbol display device 80, thereby making the player more interested in the game. It can be improved.

(B) Other application examples (1) In each of the above embodiments, the example in which “100” is set in the high-probability game number counter in step 1202 of the special electricity termination process (FIG. 29) has been described. It may be “50” or “120”. Further, the number of times of setting may be changed according to the winning result. For example, “100” is set in the case of 16R probability variation result, 4R probability variation result, and 16RRU probability variation result, and “50” is set in the case of 8RRU probability variation result and 4RRU probability variation result. Also good.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, the content of each game result is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, a configuration without a RU probability variation result may be provided, or a configuration with only a RU probability variation result may be employed. In addition, although the winning / no-win lottery mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode, the support mode may have a hit result that remains the low-frequency support mode.

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is included in the hit numerical information in the high probability mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hit numerical information in the low probability mode is high. It is good also as a structure which is not contained in the hit numerical value information in probability mode.

  (4) In each of the embodiments described above, even if the winning / raft lottery mode is the high probability mode and the low probability mode, the types of winning results to be distributed when the winning lottery is won can be different. Good.

  (5) In the first, second, and fourth to seventh embodiments, the type of the winning result by the sorting lottery regarding the first starting port 54 and the type of the winning result by the sorting lottery regarding the second starting port 55 May be configured to completely match. According to this, confirmation processing for holding notice (FIG. 30, FIG. 31, etc.) can be made common.

  (6) In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration of giving a game ball to the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 56 or the like is not limited to the configuration of paying out the game ball directly, and the function of storing virtual game media In the configuration having the above, the virtual game medium may be provided.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, when the reserved symbols are switched and displayed, the reserved symbol display area Ds * as the replacement source and the reserved symbol display area Ds * as the replacement destination are displayed in a blinking manner, for example. Or the background color may be changed. According to this, the player can easily grasp that the reserved symbol has been replaced, and can enjoy the game while increasing expectations for the game times related to the replaced reserved symbol.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, a normal hit result and a probability change hit result may be provided. That is, the transition between the high probability mode and the low probability mode of the winning / failing lottery mode may be performed in response to occurrence of a probability change result or a normal result.

  In this case, in the case where the fourth embodiment is configured to include the normal hit result and the probability change result, for example, after the probability change result and the normal hit result are generated, both are specified times (for example, 100 times). ) To shift to the high frequency support mode. As in the fourth embodiment, in the low frequency support mode (second game mode), at least “と し て” is displayed as a reserved symbol in which reach fluctuation occurs, and the high frequency support mode (first game) In the mode), when at least a reserved symbol “●” for which reach fluctuation is fixed is displayed, a winning result is always generated in the game times related to the reserved symbol. By adopting such a configuration, as in the fourth embodiment, it is possible to give a gameability that the reserved symbols that exceed the mode boundary may be switched.

  (9) In the first to third, fifth, and seventh embodiments, in the slave first to slave eighth holding areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol retaining ball storage area 154b, the hit type can be determined, When the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol, the 16R probability variation result or the 16RRU probability variation result may be determined. According to this, in the said 3rd Embodiment, even if the hold notification symbol related to the second lottery game is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol related to the first lottery game, a 16R probability change result is generated in the game times related to the hold notification symbol replaced. Therefore, the game can be continued while expecting the replacement process to occur for any of the reserved symbols related to the first and second lottery games.

  Further, when the hold notification symbol is replaced with the hold non-notification symbol, one of the RU probability change results may be determined. According to this, in each of the above-described embodiments, the ratio of the 16RRU probability variation result, the 8RRU probability variation result, and the 4RRU probability variation result with respect to the winnings to the first and second start ports 54 and 55 are equal (see FIG. 16). Even if the holding notification symbol is replaced with either the holding non-notifying symbol relating to the first lottery game or the holding non-notifying symbol relating to the second lottery game, there is no high probability that one of them has a particularly advantageous result for the player. For this reason, the player can continue the game while expecting the hold notification symbol to be replaced with the hold non-notification symbol.

  Furthermore, also in the fourth embodiment, when the holding non-notification symbol in the high probability mode (the holding symbol winning in the winning lottery but not winning in the holding notification lottery) and the holding notification symbol in the low probability mode are switched. , 16R probability variation result may be fixed. For the player, if the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the high probability mode and the reserved symbol related to the lottery game in the low probability mode are displayed at the same time, any winning result (for example, 4R probability variable winning result) However, since there is a high interest in confirming the winning result, if there is a winning non-notifying symbol in the high probability mode that wins the lottery, the low probability It is preferable to replace the hold notification symbol in the mode.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the slave first to slave eighth reserve areas RC1 to RC8 of the slave special symbol reserve ball storage area 154b, the hit type can also be determined, and if the confrontation effect is won, 16R The probability variation result or the 16 RRU probability variation result may be determined. According to this, when winning in the confrontation effect, the 16R probability change result or the 16RRU probability change result is fixed, so the player further pays attention to the confrontation effect and displays the girl character pattern before the confrontation effect. Since the game is continued in order to make it happen, the interest in the game can be improved.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, not the configuration in which the reserved symbols (holding advance notice) relating to the first and second lottery games are displayed in the first to eighth reserved symbol display areas Ds1 to Ds8 of the symbol display device 80, but the symbol display The hold symbol may be displayed on a display screen of a display device provided separately from the device 80, or the hold notice is performed by using a movable decorative member as a predetermined notice mode. Alternatively, the hold notice may be made by turning on the lamp (predetermined light emitting part), or the notice of hold may be made by outputting sound from the speaker unit 34. It is good also as a structure by which a hold notice is performed by the combination of all or one part.

  For example, when a hold notice is made by a lamp, in the first to fourth and seventh embodiments, the lamp is turned on as a display mode corresponding to the hold non-notification symbol, and the lamp is displayed as a display mode corresponding to the hold notification symbol. May be configured to blink. In the fifth embodiment, for example, the lamp is turned on as a display mode corresponding to the hold non-notification symbol, and the lamp is blinked at a low speed as the display mode corresponding to the first hold notification symbol, and corresponds to the second hold notification symbol. The display mode may be configured to blink the lamp at high speed. Furthermore, in the said 6th Embodiment, a lamp | ramp is lit as a display mode corresponding to a holding | maintenance non-notification symbol, a lamp is blinked slowly as a display mode corresponding to a 1st holding | maintenance notification symbol, and the display corresponding to a 2nd holding | maintenance notification symbol As a mode, the lamp may be blinked at high speed, and the light emission color may be different between the support zone EZ and the hold display displayed in the support zone EZ and the other hold display.

  (11) In each of the above embodiments, the hold notification symbol may be replaced with only the adjacent hold non-notification symbol (the previous hold non-notification symbol and the next hold non-notification symbol). According to this, when the hold notification symbol is displayed, the player can easily discriminate the hold non-notification symbol in which the hold notification symbol is switched, so that it becomes easy to understand the region to be noticed and without causing confusion. You can pay attention to. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 55 above, the fact that the reserved notification symbol is replaced with the adjacent reserved non-notifying symbol is a configuration in which the replacement with the adjacent reserved non-notifying symbol occurs a plurality of times. There may be.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, when hold information is acquired in response to winning at the first start port 54 or the second start port 55, information on the value of the winning random number counter C1 related to the hold information, A hold command including information on the value of the hit type counter C2 is transmitted from the main control device 91 to the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93, and a destination specifying means such as confirmation processing for hold notice is used as a sound lamp. You may make it have the control apparatus 92 and the display control apparatus 93. FIG.

  (13) In each of the above embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are separately provided, both the control devices 92 and 93 may be provided as one control device. The functions of the sound lamp control device 92 or the display control device 93 may be integrated into the main control device 91, and the functions of both the sound lamp control device 92 and the display control device 93 are integrated into the main control device 91. It is good also as a structure. Further, the voice lamp control device 92 is not configured to control the display control device 93 based on a command output from the main control device 91, but the display control device 93 is set to a voice lamp based on a command output from the main control device 91. It is good also as a structure which controls the control apparatus 92. FIG.

  (14) In each of the embodiments described above, the display control device 93 may be configured to execute the reserved symbol replacement process, instead of the voice lamp control device 92 performing the reserved symbol replacement processing.

  (15) In the first to fourth and seventh embodiments, the symbol display device 80 may not be provided, and a lottery result such as a success / failure lottery may be taught by a movable decorative member.

  (16) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that wins when the player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.
In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  For example, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, a symbol corresponding to a reserved symbol can be acquired when a medal is inserted, the rotation of the reel is started, the reel is stopped, etc. By changing the acquired symbols, it is possible to provide a new game and diversify the game. In this case, as symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols, basically different symbols may be displayed alternately as in the third embodiment, and any lottery probability may be displayed for the alternately displayed symbols. May be different.

  (17) The above embodiments may be combined as appropriate. For example, the third embodiment may be combined with the fourth to seventh embodiments so that the player can discriminate between a reserved symbol related to the first lottery game and a reserved symbol related to the second lottery game. Moreover, in the said 1st-5th, 7th embodiment, you may make it equip the lower display area Ds with the execution reservation symbol display area Ds0 like the said 6th Embodiment (refer FIG. 78 etc.). In addition, the player's interest in the game may be improved by appropriately combining them or by further combining them.

(C) Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment The following describes the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each embodiment described above, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

(0) Feature M group Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state is triggered when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery of whether or not to shift is performed. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed in which (stop result) is displayed. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a so-called winning game state winning, for example, after a display effect for one game is executed, for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the start port while the display device is performing a variable display of information, information used for winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) as an upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is to be (held). When the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variation display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (for example, (See JP 2004-81853 A).

  In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the player's attention to the game, and the feature M group solves the problem.

Feature M0. Progress control means (MPU 11 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing the process for progress (timer interrupt process in each of the above embodiments);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a prescribed number set to an integer value greater than 1,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the success / failure information group in the allocation information, and a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit In some cases, a grant determination means (a function for executing a special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main controller 91) that sequentially executes the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the success / failure information group, a bonus game (for example, a long time mode) A privilege granting means (a function for executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for providing the variable winning device 56 at the opening / closing execution mode).
Predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit is stored in the acquisition information storage unit or information corresponding to a determination result when the grant determination target is obtained. Destination specifying means (main control) for identifying information corresponding to a determination result when predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the grant determination A function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 112 of the apparatus 91),
A notification means (symbol display device 80) reflects a destination notification reflecting a specification result by the destination specifying means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes a target of the determination of grant. ) And a previous notification control means (a function of executing a hold command response process of the voice lamp control device 92 and a function of notifying a hold symbol in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93).
The prior notification control means includes
Based on the identification result by the destination identification means, the destination notification reflecting means (voice lamp) for selecting either the first destination notification or the second destination notification different from the first destination notification as the destination notification reflecting the specification result. The function of executing the processing of S2203, S2302, and S2303 in the MPU 152 of the control device 92);
In the case where the first destination notification and the second destination notification are notified by the notification means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first destination notification and the second destination notification are replaced with each other. A gaming machine comprising: a destination notification replacement unit (a function of executing the processes of S2203, S2302, and S2303 in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92) that executes a replacement process to be notified to the notification unit.

  According to the feature M0, the prior notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. In the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order of the determination of grant is the subject of grant determination for the later special information is first displayed. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to a player's game can be improved. Further, when the first destination notification and the second destination notification are notified by the notification means, there is a possibility that the first destination notification and the second destination notification may be switched and notified. Can provide. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; In the configuration including the “information acquisition means”, instead of the configuration of “acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”, “the game ball enters the start ball entrance portion” It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which special information is acquired based on what has been done.

  Feature M1. The gaming machine according to the feature M0, wherein the second destination notification is a destination notification that causes the player to recognize that the probability that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group is higher than the first destination notification.

  According to the feature M1, the second destination notification has a higher probability that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group than the first destination notification (the probability that a hit result will occur), so the player generates the second destination notification. The game can be continued while expecting to do. And when 2nd destination alerting | reporting generate | occur | produces, the novel game nature that the said 2nd destination alerting | reporting may be alert | reported by replacing with the other 1st ahead alerting | reporting can be provided. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Feature M2. When the destination notification replacement unit replaces the first destination notification and the second destination notification, the predetermined special information targeted by the destination specifying unit corresponds to the success / failure information group. The gaming machine according to Feature M1, wherein the identified first destination notification and the second destination notification are interchanged.

Feature M3. When the predetermined special information specified by the destination specifying means is specified as corresponding to the success / failure information group, the predetermined special information when the specified information is specified as hit information and specified by the destination specifying means When it is determined that the predetermined special information when it is specified that the predetermined special information does not correspond to the success / failure information group is outlier information,
The destination notification replacement means determines that there is a notification reflecting the hit information as the first destination notification, and that a notification reflecting the outlier information exists as the second destination notification, and a predetermined condition The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein when the is established, the notification means is notified by switching between the first destination notification reflecting the hit information and the second destination notification reflecting the outlier information. .

  According to the features M2 and M3, when the second destination notification is replaced with the first destination notification, the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group in the grant determination corresponding to the replaced second destination notification. It is determined that That is, in the variable display times (game times) related to the replaced second destination notification, a bonus game is given to the player. For this reason, the player first continues the game while expecting the second destination notification to occur, and if the second destination notification occurs, the player expects the second destination notification to be replaced. Pay attention to. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Feature M4. The destination notification replacement means determines that only the notification reflecting the outlier information exists as the first destination notification and that the notification reflecting the outlier information exists as the second destination notification, and a predetermined condition The gaming machine according to feature M3, wherein when the is established, the notification means is notified by switching between the first destination notification reflecting the outlier information and the second destination notification reflecting the outlier information. .

  According to the feature M4, even if the second destination notification is replaced with the first destination notification, the grant determination regarding the second destination notification may not determine that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group. There is. In other words, the bonus game is not always given to the player in the variable display times related to the replaced second destination notification. For this reason, it can be regarded as one effect in the game (so-called game chance up effect) that the first and second notifications are switched and notified, and the game can be diversified. . Therefore, it can suppress that a player gets tired of a game early.

  Feature M5. The second destination notification includes a second lower level notification and a second higher level notification that causes the player to recognize that the probability that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group is higher than the second lower level notification. The gaming machine according to Feature M3 or M4, wherein

  According to the feature M5, it is possible to provide a novel game property that the second lower-level destination notification and the second higher-level destination notification may be notified by being replaced with the first destination notification. Moreover, even if the second higher-order destination notification having the highest probability that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group is notified, the second higher-order destination notification is also replaced with the first destination notification to be notified. It is possible to keep the player focused on the game. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Feature M6. The destination notification replacement means includes the second lower-level destination notification and the second higher-level destination that reflect the outlier information in addition to the first destination notification, while there is a notification reflecting the hit information as the first destination notification. When it is determined that a notification exists and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first destination notification reflecting the hit information and the second lower-order destination notification or the second higher-order destination notification reflecting the outlier information The gaming machine according to feature M5, wherein one of the above is replaced and the notification means is notified.

  According to the feature M6, the player's interest in the game without losing the significance of the second lower notification and the second upper notification in which the probability that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group is higher than that in the first notification. Can be improved.

  Here, a problem in the case where the second lower destination notification and the second upper destination notification are notified by the notification means will be described.

  As the second destination notification, the notification means includes a second lower level notification and a second higher level notification that causes the player to recognize that the special information is more likely to correspond to the success / failure information group than the second lower level notification. In the gaming machine to be notified, the second lower-level destination notification and the second higher-level destination notification may be notified by the notification means together (simultaneously). In this case, in general, when a plurality of first destination notifications are notified between the second higher-order destination notification and the second higher-order destination notification, the player can perform the variable display times related to the second lower-order destination notification. However, they tend to watch the game results with some expectation. However, generally, when the second higher-order destination notification is notified by the notification means immediately after the second lower-order notification, the player tends to lose interest in the variable display times related to the second lower-order notification. It tends to desire to shift to the variable display time for the second higher-order destination notification as soon as possible. For this reason, in such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that the player cannot fully enjoy the interest to the second lower destination notification and the second upper destination notification.

  In addition, although it may be considered as a gaming machine that does not display the second lower destination notification and the second upper destination notification at the same time, after one second destination notification (for example, the second lower destination notification) is notified, If the second advance notification (for example, the second higher-order advance notification) is not notified, the significance of adding a game that allows the player to confirm or predict the content of the previous notification by performing the previous notification is diminished. .

  On the other hand, according to the feature M6, even when the second lower-order destination notification is replaced with the first-priority notification, the provision regarding the replaced second lower-order destination notification is provided by providing the configuration such as the feature M2. In the determination, it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group. For this reason, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the second lower destination notification without losing interest in the second lower destination notification, and to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Feature M7. The destination notification replacement means includes the second lower-level destination notification and the second higher-level destination that reflect the outlier information in addition to the first destination notification, while there is a notification reflecting the hit information as the first destination notification. When it is determined that a notification is present and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the notification unit replaces the first destination notification reflecting the hit information and the second subordinate destination notification reflecting the outlier information. The probability that the notification means is notified is set higher than the probability that the notification means is notified by switching the first destination notification reflecting the hit information and the second higher-order destination notification reflecting the outlier information. The gaming machine according to Feature M6, wherein

  According to the feature M7, when the first destination notification reflecting the hit information, the second lower-level destination notification reflecting the outlier information, and the second higher-level destination notification are notified by the notification means, the second lower-order destination The notification is easily replaced with the first destination notification. For this reason, it becomes easy for the player to experience a game (production) in which the second lower-level notification is replaced with the first notification. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the second lower order notification.

  Feature M8. When the second lower-level destination notification and the second higher-level destination notification are notified to the notification means, the destination notification replacement unit is configured to perform the second lower-level destination notification and the second lower-level notification when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features M5 to M7, wherein the notification unit is notified by replacing upper-order destination notification.

  According to the feature M8, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that there is a possibility that the second lower-level destination notification and the second higher-level destination notification are switched and notified. Accordingly, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Feature M9. When it is determined that the first destination notification reflecting the hit information is present and the second destination notification is not present, the destination notification allocating means sets the first notification as the next notification reflecting the next outlier information. The gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M8, characterized in that the probability of selecting the second destination notification is higher than in the case where two-point notification is present.

  According to the feature M9, when the first destination notification reflecting the hit information exists, the second destination notification is likely to occur. For this reason, it becomes easy for the player to experience a game (effect) in which the first destination notification and the second destination notification are switched and notified. Furthermore, since the bonus game is given to the player in the variable display times related to the replaced second destination notification, the player is excited (expectation) due to the replacement of the first destination notification and the second destination notification. It becomes easy to experience. For this reason, the player can be made to pay attention to the game.

  Feature M10. Any one of the features M1 to M9, wherein the notification destination replacement means causes the notification means to replace the previous notifications that are consecutive in the notified order or to repeat the replacement. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature M10, replacement of the previous notifications in the notified order occurs. For this reason, it becomes easy for the player to grasp which destination notification is replaced, and it is possible to suppress confusion due to the replacement of the previous notification. In addition, when the replacement of the previous notification is repeated, it is possible to give the player a game of predicting where to be finally notified (whether to stop), and to improve the player's interest in the game. .

Feature M11. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player;
An operation effective period determining means for determining an operation effective period of the operation means (function for executing an operation effective lottery process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92);
Operation notifying means (function for executing operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) for notifying the operation by the notifying means after determining the operation valid period,
When the destination notification replacement unit determines that the operation unit is operated by the player during the operation effective period determined by the operation effective period determination unit as one of the predetermined conditions, The gaming machine according to any one of features M0 to M10, wherein the notifications are exchanged and the notification means is notified.

  According to the feature M11, the operation notification is made to cause the player to operate the operation means, and the previous notifications are replaced on the condition that the player operates the operation means. For this reason, the player pays attention to the game while expecting the operation notification to occur. When an operation notification occurs, the player operates the operation means so that the previous notifications are exchanged, so that a game for operating the operation means for the player is added, thereby diversifying the game. Can do. In addition, when the player does not want to generate a replacement effect in which the previous notifications are replaced, the player can also select not to operate the operation means, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored early in the game.

  Feature M12. If the destination notification replacement means determines that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation effective period determined by the operation effective period determination means as one of the predetermined conditions, The gaming machine according to feature M11, wherein after the operation valid period has elapsed, the notifications are exchanged and the notification means is notified.

According to the feature M12, even if the player cannot operate the operation means for some reason, the previous notifications are replaced after the operation valid period has elapsed since the operation notification was given.
For this reason, for example, when the second destination notification is generated because there is the first destination notification reflecting the hit information as in the feature M9, the loss of the significance of the second destination notification can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity in production.

Feature M13. A launch control means (game ball launch mechanism 44) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player;
A first start entrance portion (first start port 54) and a second start entrance portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; Prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when a game ball enters the first starting entrance part, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start entrance part. Acquired,
In addition to the above-mentioned grant determination, the grant determination means, when the result of grant determination in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the grant correspondence result, the special information is the second start ball entering part In the case where the special information is acquired when triggered by entering the ball, the special information is more advantageous to the player than when the special information is obtained when triggered by entering the first starting pitching unit. Make a distribution determination with a high probability of selecting a reward game,
The gaming machine according to any one of features M0 to M12, wherein the bonus granting unit grants the bonus game to a player based on the grant determination result and the distribution determination result.

  According to the feature M13, since the first start ball entering part and the second start ball entering part are provided, it is possible to increase the chance that the special information is acquired. In addition, in this gaming machine, when a game ball enters the second start entrance part, a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is given compared to when a game ball enters the first start entrance part. It is easy. For this reason, in the case where the configuration such as the feature M1 is provided, the special information is determined to be the success / failure information group when the second notification is triggered by the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting pitching portion. Despite the higher probability of responding to the game, the player may be discouraged and lose interest in the game.

  However, since the configuration of the feature M0 is provided, the second destination notification is replaced with the first destination notification triggered by the game ball entering the second starting entrance part and notified. Therefore, even if the previous notification triggered by the game ball entering the first starting pitching part is the second previous notification, the player is prevented from losing interest in the second previous notification. it can.

  Feature M14. The prior notification allocating means, when selecting the prior notification, when the game ball has entered the second start ball entering part, when the game ball enters the first start ball entering part The gaming machine according to feature M13, characterized in that the probability of selecting the second first notification is lower than when triggered by the ball entering.

  According to the feature M14, the first destination notification is easily selected as the destination notification triggered by the game ball having entered the second starting pitching portion. For this reason, the second destination notification triggered by the game ball entering the first start ball entering portion, and the first destination notification triggered by the game ball entering the second start ball entering portion, Is likely to be replaced, and the player can be prevented from losing interest regarding the first first notification.

  Feature M15. The game area is provided with a game ball guiding section (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. The gaming machine according to feature M13 or M14.

  According to the feature M15, the player can easily cause the game ball to enter the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently and the opportunity for many grant determinations to be performed can be obtained.

Feature M16. The game area has a entrance where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball that has entered from the entrance and rotated in a first direction by a predetermined angle, and rotates to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The game ball is guided to the first start entrance part by the above, and the game ball entered from the entrance is received in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. The gaming machine according to Feature M15, wherein the gaming ball is guided to the second starting entrance part.

  According to the feature M16, it is possible to guide and distribute game balls alternately to the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion using a common member. For this reason, compared with the case where the member which distributes a game ball is provided in the 1st starting entrance part and the 2nd starting entrance part, respectively, reduction of a number of parts can be aimed at.

  Feature M17. The game ball guiding unit is located at a position facing the game ball that has entered the entrance, in a state where the game ball guiding unit is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the game ball that has entered and is predetermined in the second direction. A first passive portion (accommodating portion 64a) that rotates to an angle and a position that faces the game ball that has entered the entrance, in a state where it has been rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction, and the game ball that has entered And a second passive part (accommodating part 64b) that rotates in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the entrance. Before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction before the game ball enters the entrance after the second passive part rotates in the first direction. Rotation restricting means (a magnet 64c, a base side magnet 65) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction. The gaming machine according to the features M16, characterized in that it has a).

  According to the gaming machine M17, since the rotation restricting means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball, and then the game ball enters the entrance. It is restrained from rotating before the ball. That is, it can suppress turning without receiving a game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters continuously into one of the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently enter the game balls alternately into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section.

  Feature M18. The advance notification control means is triggered by the advance notification triggered by the game ball entering the first start ball entering portion and the game ball entering the second start ball entering portion. The game machine according to any one of features M13 to M17, wherein the notification unit is caused to notify the notification unit as a different notification mode.

  According to the feature M18, whether the first advance notification notified by the notification means is triggered by the game ball entering the first start entrance part, or to the second start entrance part It becomes easy for the player to easily grasp whether the game ball is triggered. For this reason, when the configuration of the feature M1 is provided, the player is highly likely to be discouraged when the notification triggered by the game ball entering the first starting entrance portion is the second destination notification. However, since the second destination notification may be replaced with the first destination notification triggered by the game ball entering the second starting entrance portion, the first starting entrance portion may be notified. Even if the previous notification triggered by the entry of a game ball is the second previous notification, it is possible to suppress losing interest regarding the second previous notification.

(1) Feature A group Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state is triggered when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery of whether or not to shift is performed. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed in which (stop result) is displayed. And when the lottery result is so-called winning game state winning, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the start port while the display device is performing a variable display of information, information used for winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) as an upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is to be (held). When the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variation display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (for example, (See JP 2004-81853 A).

  Further, in such a gaming machine, a first game mode (for example, a high probability mode in which it is easy to win a winning game state) and a second game mode different from the first game mode (for example, a high probability mode to a winning game state). (For example, refer to JP2013-255733A).

  In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the player's attention to the game, and in particular, to increase the player's attention to the game when the mode is switched between the first game mode and the second game mode. It is desired to increase. The feature A group solves the problem.

Feature A1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing the progress processing (timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a prescribed number set to an integer value greater than 1,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the success / failure information group in the allocation information, and a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit In some cases, a grant determination means (a function for executing a special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main controller 91) that sequentially executes the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the success / failure information group, a bonus game (for example, a long time mode) A privilege granting means (a function for executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for providing the variable winning device 56 at the opening / closing execution mode).
Predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit is stored in the acquisition information storage unit or information corresponding to a determination result when the grant determination target is obtained. Destination specifying means (main control) for identifying information corresponding to a determination result when predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the grant determination A function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 112 of the apparatus 91),
A notification means (symbol display device 80) reflects a destination notification reflecting a specification result by the destination specifying means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes a target of the determination of grant. ) And a previous notification control means (a function of executing a hold command response process of the voice lamp control device 92 and a function of notifying a hold symbol in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93).
The prior notification control means sets the first game mode (for example, high probability mode or high frequency support mode) to give a specified number of times (for example, 100 times) from a predetermined reference timing (for example, opening / closing execution mode), If the grant determination when the game mode is not the first game mode is the second game mode (for example, the low probability mode or the low frequency support mode), the specific result is reflected in the first game mode and the second game mode. A prior notification allocating means (a function of executing the processes of S2203 and S2302 in the MPU 152 of the audio lamp control device 92) for selecting either the first prior notification or the second prior notification different from the first prior notification as the prior notification. ,
In the case where both the previous notification in the first game mode and the previous notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, one game mode of the first game mode or the second game mode When it is determined that the first destination notification exists in the destination notification and the second destination notification exists in the destination notification of the other game mode, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, First notification replacement means (replacement processing of the sound lamp control device 92) for executing replacement processing for informing the notification means by switching the first destination notification in one game mode and the second destination notification in the other game mode. A game machine having a function of

  According to the characteristic A1, the prior notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. In the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order of the determination of grant is the subject of grant determination for the later special information is first A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  Also, when the first destination notification exists in the first notification in one game mode of the first game mode or the second game mode and the second destination notification exists in the previous notification in the other game mode Thus, it is possible to provide a novel gameability in which the first destination notification and the second destination notification are switched across the boundary between the game modes of the first game mode and the second game mode. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; In the configuration including the “information acquisition means”, instead of the configuration of “acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”, “the game ball enters the start ball entrance portion” It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which special information is acquired based on what has been done.

Feature A2. The success / failure information group in the grant information includes a first success / failure information group (a low-probability success / failure information group (FIG. 15A)) and a second number in which the number corresponding to the special information is larger than the first success / failure information group The success / failure information group (high-probability success / failure information group (FIG. 15B)) is set,
In the first game mode, the destination specifying means specifies the determination result of the grant determination based on the second success / failure information group, and in the second game mode, the destination determination result is assigned to the first success / failure information group. Based on
The first notification distribution means determines that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group when the grant determination is executed. The first notification in the first game mode and the second game mode. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the second notification is replaced with the notification means.

Feature A3. When the predetermined special information specified by the destination specifying means is specified as corresponding to the success / failure information group, the predetermined special information when the specified information is specified as hit information and specified by the destination specifying means When it is determined that the predetermined special information when it is specified that the predetermined special information does not correspond to the success / failure information group is outlier information,
In the first game mode, the prior notification allocating unit selects the first prior notification or the second prior notification as the prior notification reflecting the winning information, and as the prior notification reflecting the outlier information. The first destination notification is selected, and in the second game mode, the first destination notification or the second destination notification is selected as the destination notification.
The destination notification replacement means includes a notification reflecting the hit information as the first destination notification in the first game mode, and a notification reflecting the outage information as the second destination notification in the second game mode. When the predetermined condition is established, the notification means is notified by switching the first destination notification reflecting the hit information and the second destination notification reflecting the outlier information. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by that.

  According to the features A2 and A3, in the first game mode, when the second destination notification is notified, it is determined that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group in the assignment determination regarding the second destination notification. That is, in the first game mode, a privilege game is given to the player in the variable display times (game times) related to the second destination notification. For this reason, even if all the previous notifications for the specified number of times in the first game mode are notified, the player first selects the second game mode when all the previous notifications in the first game mode are first notifications. The game is continued while expecting the second destination notification to occur. That is, it is possible to prompt the player to continue the game beyond the mode. When the second destination notification occurs in the second game mode, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the second destination notification is replaced with the first destination notification in the first game mode. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, when both the prior notification in the first game mode and the previous notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, as the prior notification in the second game mode, if it is the first game mode, the player is notified. Since the second destination notification to which the privilege game is given can be notified, the game can be diversified.

  That is, when the first notification in the first game mode and the second notification in the second game mode are switched so as not to be notified, that is, in the conventional gaming machine, the first notification in the first game mode and the second game mode When both the previous notification and the notification means are notified, the player is notified of the second previous notification to which the bonus game is given as the previous notification regarding the second game mode. In addition to losing expectation regarding the second notice, there is a possibility of disgust. For this reason, in the conventional gaming machine, when both the first notification in the first game mode and the second notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, so-called prohibition processing is executed. In some cases, the first notification in the game mode is always the first notification.

  However, in such a pachinko machine, the first notification (effect) at the time of transition from the first game mode to the second game mode is always the first first notification, and the player can change from the first game mode to the second game mode. There is a possibility that you will get bored early, while not paying attention to the effects when transitioning to the game mode.

  On the other hand, as shown in the features A2 and A3, the first game notification in the first game mode and the second game notification in the second game mode may be interchanged, so that the prohibition process is performed in the second game mode. There is no need to execute the first game mode, and it is possible to diversify the effects when the first notification in the first game mode and the previous notification in the second game mode are displayed together. Further, when both the first notification in the first game mode and the second notification in the second game mode are displayed, when the second notification is notified as the second notification in the second game mode, the second destination When the notification is replaced with the first destination notification in the first game mode, the bonus game is given to the player in the variable display times regarding the second destination notification. For this reason, it is possible to make the player have great expectation and to improve the willingness to promote the game by notifying the second advance notification as the advance notification of the second game mode. .

  Feature A4. The prior notification allocating means is configured to notify the first notification in the first game mode when the prior notification in the first game mode and the previous notification in the second game mode are both notified by the notification means. When it is determined that the first destination notification reflecting the hit information is present and the second destination notification reflecting the outlier information is not present in the second notification of the second game mode, When selecting the next advance notice in the second game mode, the probability of selecting the second advance notice is higher than when the second advance notice exists in the advance notice in the second game mode. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein:

  According to feature A4, when both the first notification in the first game mode and the previous notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, the first information that reflects the hit information in the first notification in the first game mode is reflected. In the case where the first notification is present, the second notification is likely to occur as the first notification in the second game mode. This makes it easier for the player to experience a game (effect) in which the first destination notification in the first game mode and the second destination notification in the second game mode are switched and notified. Further, in the change display times related to the second destination notification in the replaced first game mode, a bonus game is given to the player, so that the player is switched between the first destination notification and the second destination notification. This makes it easier to experience excitement (expectation). For this reason, the player can be made to pay attention to the game.

  Feature A5. The prior notification allocating means is configured to notify the first notification in the first game mode when the prior notification in the first game mode and the previous notification in the second game mode are both notified by the notification means. When selecting the first notification, the first notification is selected. After that, when selecting the first notification of the second game mode, the winning information is reflected in the first notification of the first game mode. When it is determined that there is something to be performed, the probability of selecting the second destination notification is increased compared to the case where it is determined that there is something that reflects the outlier information in the first destination notification in the first game mode. The gaming machine according to Feature A3 or A4, wherein

  According to the feature A5, when both the first notification in the first game mode and the second notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, in the first game mode, the first notification is performed as the previous notification. I am trying to select it. That is, when both the first notification in the first game mode and the previous notification in the second game mode are notified by the notification means, even in the first game mode, even if the previous notification reflecting the hit information is performed, Two-point notification is not generated. For this reason, even if the previous notification at the specified number of times in the first game mode is notified by the notification means, the player continues the game while expecting the second previous notification to occur in the second game mode. it can.

  Further, when the first notification in which the hit information is reflected exists in the first notification in the first game mode, the second notification in the second game mode is likely to occur. For this reason, similarly to the feature A4, the player can easily experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the first destination notification and the second destination notification. For this reason, the player can be made to pay attention to the game.

  Feature A6. The destination notification control unit is a destination notification distinguishing unit (high level of the display control device 93) that causes the notification unit to notify the destination notification of the first game mode and the destination notification of the second game mode as different notification modes. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the gaming machine has a function of displaying a probability mode and a low probability mode.

  According to the feature A6, the player can easily grasp whether the previous notification notified by the notification means is the first notification in the first game mode or the second notification in the second game mode. For this reason, it is possible to give the player the ability to check the game mode. Further, the player can continue the game while expecting that the second notification will be generated as the second notification in the second game mode in a state where the player has recognized that the first notification in the first game mode has ended. You can continue playing while maintaining your interest.

  Feature A7. Any one of the features A1 to A6, wherein the prior notification replacement means causes the notification means to replace the continuous prior notifications in the notified order or to repeat the replacement. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A7, replacement of the continuous previous notifications in the notified order occurs. For this reason, it becomes easy for the player to grasp which destination notification is replaced, and it is possible to suppress confusion due to the replacement of the previous notification. In addition, when the replacement of the previous notification is repeated, it is possible to give the player a game of predicting where the event will be finally notified (whether to stop). In particular, when the configuration such as the feature A2 is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding whether or not the second notification in the second game mode is notified as the first notification in the first game mode. Can improve the interest of the game.

Feature A8. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player;
An operation effective period determining means for determining an operation effective period of the operation means (function for executing an operation effective lottery process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92);
Operation notifying means (function for executing operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) for notifying the operation by the notifying means after determining the operation valid period,
As one of the predetermined conditions, the destination notification replacement unit determines that the operation unit has been operated by a player during the operation effective period determined by the operation effective period determination unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein the notification means is notified by switching between the first notification and the second notification.

  According to the feature A8, the operation notification is made to cause the player to operate the operation means, and the first destination notification and the second destination notification are switched on condition that the player operates the operation means. For this reason, the player pays attention to the game while paying attention to the fact that the operation notification is generated when the first destination notification and the second destination notification are generated. And, when the operation notification occurs, the player operates the operation means so that the first destination notification and the second destination notification are interchanged, so that a game for operating the operation means for the player is added, Diversification of games can be achieved. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, the player can also select not to operate the operation means when the player does not want to generate a replacement effect in which the first destination notification and the second destination notification are switched. For this reason, in the case of having a configuration such as the feature A2 or the like, whether the player senses that a win is generated in advance by generating a replacement effect or whether to enjoy the effect without intentionally generating a replacement effect You can choose. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Feature A9. If the destination notification replacement means determines that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation effective period determined by the operation effective period determination means as one of the predetermined conditions, The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein after the operation effective period has elapsed, the first notification and the second notification are switched to cause the notification means to be notified.

  According to the feature A9, even if the player cannot operate the operation means for some reason, the first destination notification and the second destination notification are switched after the operation valid period has elapsed since the operation notification was given. For this reason, for example, when the second destination notification is generated because there is the first destination notification reflecting the hit information as in the feature A4, the loss of the significance of the second destination notification can be suppressed. It is possible to suppress a sense of incongruity in production.

Feature A10. A launch control means (game ball launch mechanism 44) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player;
A first start entrance portion (first start port 54) and a second start entrance portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; Prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when a game ball enters the first starting entrance part, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start entrance part. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the gaming machine is acquired.

  According to the feature A10, since at least the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, the chance of acquiring special information can be increased.

  Feature A11. The game area is provided with a game ball guiding section (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. The gaming machine according to Feature A10.

  According to the feature A11, the player can easily cause the game ball to enter the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently and the opportunity for many grant determinations to be performed can be obtained.

Feature A12. The game area has a entrance where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball that has entered from the entrance and rotated in a first direction by a predetermined angle, and rotates to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The game ball is guided to the first start entrance part by the above, and the game ball entered from the entrance is received in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the gaming ball is guided to the second starting entrance part.

  According to the feature A12, the game balls can be distributed and guided alternately to the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion using a common member. For this reason, compared with the case where the member which distributes a game ball is provided in the 1st starting entrance part and the 2nd starting entrance part, respectively, reduction of a number of parts can be aimed at.

  Feature A13. The game ball guiding unit is located at a position facing the game ball that has entered the entrance, in a state where the game ball guiding unit is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the game ball that has entered and is predetermined in the second direction. A first passive portion (accommodating portion 64a) that rotates to an angle and a position that faces the game ball that has entered the entrance, in a state where it has been rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction, and the game ball that has entered And a second passive part (accommodating part 64b) that rotates in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the entrance. Before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction before the game ball enters the entrance after the second passive part rotates in the first direction. Rotation restricting means (a magnet 64c, a base side magnet 65) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction. The gaming machine according to the features A12, characterized in that a).

  According to the feature A13, since the rotation restricting means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball, and then the game ball enters the entrance. It is suppressed that it rotates before doing. That is, it can suppress turning without receiving a game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters continuously into one of the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently enter the game balls alternately into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section.

(2) Feature B group Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state is triggered when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery of whether or not to shift is performed. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed in which (stop result) is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is so-called winning game state winning, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the start port while the display device is performing a variable display of information, information used for winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) as an upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is to be (held). When the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variation display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (for example, (See JP 2004-81853 A).

  By the way, in such a gaming machine, there is one that informs the player of information (holding information) used for winning lottery (preliminary notification), and there are also some that have multiple notification methods. In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the player's interest in the game by further devising a notification method, and the feature B group solves the problem.

Feature B1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing the progress processing (timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a prescribed number set to an integer value greater than 1,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the success / failure information group in the allocation information, and a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit In some cases, a grant determination means (a function for executing a special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main controller 91) that sequentially executes the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the success / failure information group, a bonus game (for example, a long time mode) A privilege granting means (a function for executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for providing the variable winning device 56 at the opening / closing execution mode).
Predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit is stored in the acquisition information storage unit or information corresponding to a determination result when the grant determination target is obtained. Destination specifying means (main control) for identifying information corresponding to a determination result when predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the grant determination A function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 112 of the apparatus 91),
A notification including a plurality of notification areas for a destination notification reflecting a specification result by the destination specifying unit at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying unit becomes a target of the grant determination. Means for notifying by means (symbol display device 80) (a function for executing the hold command response processing of the sound lamp control device 92 and a function for notifying the hold symbol in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93); With
The prior notification control means includes
Based on the identification result by the destination identification means, the destination notification reflecting means (voice lamp) for selecting either the first destination notification or the second destination notification different from the first destination notification as the destination notification reflecting the specification result. The function of executing the processing of S2203 and S2302 in the MPU 152 of the control device 92);
The second special notification is a means that is executed in preference to the prior notice distribution means when the second notice is notified by the notification means, and the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying means. Is determined to correspond to the success / failure information group, and the predetermined special information corresponding to the success / failure information group corresponds to the success / failure information group. When the predetermined special information when it is specified that the information is not included is used as outlier information, the first informing that reflects the next outlier information is different from the first informing and the first and second ahead informing. Subordinate notification allocating means (a function for executing the processing of S2303 in the MPU 152 of the audio lamp control device 92) for selecting one of the prior notifications including the three previous notifications and excluding the second previous notification. ,
In a case where the first destination notification and the third destination notification are notified by the notification means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first destination notification and the third destination notification are replaced with each other. A gaming machine comprising: a destination notification replacement unit (a function of executing the processing of S2505a, S2505b, S2510, and S2511 of the sound lamp control device 92) that executes a replacement process to be notified to the notification unit.

  According to the characteristic B1, the prior notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. In the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order of the determination of grant is the subject of grant determination for the later special information is first A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to a player's game can be improved. In addition, when the third destination notification occurs, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that the third destination notification may be replaced with another first destination notification. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, when the third destination notification occurs, the positional relationship (notification relationship) between the second destination notification and the third destination notification changes by replacing the third destination notification with another first destination notification. Therefore, the effect can be varied depending on the positional relationship between the second destination notification and the third destination notification, and the player can confirm or predict the positional relationship between the third destination notification and the second destination notification. Is added. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; In the configuration including the “information acquisition means”, instead of the configuration of “acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”, “the game ball enters the start ball entrance portion” It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which special information is acquired based on what has been done.

  Feature B2. The subordinate notification allocating notification means selects the prior notification different from the third prior notification when the third prior notification is already notified by the notification means. Game machines.

  According to the feature B2, when the third destination notification is notified by the notification means, the third destination notification is not redundantly notified. For this reason, it is possible to clarify the prior notification that the player should pay attention to (third prior notification), and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is confused by the replacement of the previous notification that the player is not paying attention to.

Feature B3. A pattern display means (pattern display device 80) for variably displaying the pattern;
Display control means (display control device 93) for controlling display of the variable display and the predetermined effect in the picture display means,
When the variable display times related to the second destination notification are started on the pattern display means, the display control means is a special effect (confrontation) that is different from the normal effect after the variable display times related to the first destination notification is started. After displaying the production), the production content includes an advantageous content (winning production) that suggests that the bonus game will be executed and a non-advantage content (defeat production) that suggests that the bonus game will not be executed. The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, characterized in that any one of them is displayed.

  According to the feature B3, since the special effect is displayed in the variable display times related to the second destination notification, the player can continue the game while expecting the second destination notification to occur.

Feature B4. The prior notification control means is special for a predetermined number of notification areas in which prior notification after the second prior notification is performed in the notification area when the second prior notification is notified to the notification means. Special area setting means for setting the area (function of setting the support zone EZ in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93),
In the case where the third destination notification is notified in a notification area different from the special area, the destination notification replacement means, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first destination notification in the special area and the Replacing the third prior notification outside the special area and informing the notification means,
When the third display notification is present in the special area, the display control means has the third notification in the special area when the variable display time relating to the second notification is started. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the special effect having a higher probability of being the advantageous content is displayed than when not.

  According to the feature B4, when the second destination notification occurs, a special area is set, and the first destination notification in the special area and the third destination notification outside the special area may be switched and notified. It can provide a new gameability. In addition, when the third destination notification is present in the special area, a special effect with a higher probability of being advantageous than that in the case where the third destination notification is not present in the special area is displayed. When the second destination notification occurs, the game is continued while expecting the third destination notification to occur, and when the third destination notification occurs, the third destination notification is the first destination notification in the special area. Pay attention to games while expecting to be replaced. For this reason, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  That is, when the configuration of the feature B4 is not provided, a special effect is displayed in the variable display times related to the second destination notification. Therefore, when the player is notified of the second destination notification, the variable display times related to the second destination notification is displayed. There is a possibility of watching the game results until the game starts. That is, when the second notification is notified, the player may not perform the act of causing the information acquisition unit to acquire the special information.

  On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature B4, when the third destination notification exists in the special area, the special effect has a higher probability of being advantageous than the case where the third destination notification does not exist in the special area. Is displayed, the game can be continued while expecting the player to generate the third destination notification even after the second destination notification is notified.

  Feature B5. The destination notification replacement means determines that the second destination notification reflects the hit information, determines that the first destination notification that reflects the outlier information exists in the special area, and is determined in advance. When the condition is satisfied, the notification means is notified by switching the first destination notification reflecting the outlier information existing in the special area and the third destination notification existing outside the special area. The gaming machine according to Feature B4.

  According to the feature B5, when the second destination notification is the destination notification reflecting the hit information, the third destination notification outside the special area is replaced with the first destination notification reflecting the outlier information in the special area and notified. Therefore, when the third destination notification occurs, the player pays attention to the game while expecting that the third destination notification is replaced with the first destination notification in the special area. For this reason, the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

  Feature B6. The destination notification replacement unit determines that the second destination notification reflects the outlier information, determines that the first destination notification reflecting the hit information exists in the special area, and is determined in advance. When the above condition is satisfied, the notification means is notified by switching the first destination notification reflecting the hit information existing in the special area and the third destination notification outside the special area. A gaming machine according to feature B4 or B5.

  According to the feature B6, when the first destination notification existing in the special area reflects the hit information, the third destination notification outside the special area is replaced with the first destination notification reflecting the hit information in the special area. Since the notification is made, when the third destination notification occurs, the player pays attention to the game while expecting the third destination notification to be replaced with the first destination notification in the special area. For this reason, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, when it is set as such a game machine, since it determines with special information corresponding to the success / failure information group by the assignment determination regarding the replaced third destination notification, the special effect is changed according to the third destination notification. The display is preferably extended to the display times.

  Feature B7. The destination notification replacement means determines that the second destination notification reflects the outlier information, determines that the first destination notification in the special area is notification reflecting the outlier information, and determines in advance. When the set condition is satisfied, the notification means is notified by switching the first destination notification existing in the special area and the third destination notification outside the special area. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B7, even if the third destination notification is replaced with the first destination notification in the special area, it may not be determined that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group. For this reason, the presence of the third destination notification in the special area can be regarded as one effect in the game (so-called game opportunity up effect), and the game can be diversified. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage, and to improve the interest in the game.

  Feature B8. The follower notification allocating unit determines that the second destination notification reflects the hit information, or determines that there is a notification reflecting the hit information in the first destination notification in the special area. In the previous notification reflecting the next outlier information, only the second notification in which the second previous notification reflects the outlier information and the first destination notification in the special area also reflects the outlier information. The gaming machine according to any of features B4 to B7, wherein the probability of selecting the third destination notification is higher than when it is determined that

  According to the feature B8, when the second destination notification reflecting the hit information is present, or when the first destination notification reflecting the hit information is present in the special area, the third destination notification is likely to occur. For this reason, the player can easily experience a game (effect) in which the third destination notification outside the special area and the first destination notification in the special area are switched and notified. Furthermore, in the variable display times related to the second destination notification, or in the variable display times (game times) related to the replaced third destination notification, the player is given a privilege game, and therefore the player can perform the first destination notification and the first notification. It becomes easier to experience the excitement (expectation) due to the replacement of the three-point notification. For this reason, the player can be made to pay attention to the game.

Feature B9. In the case of the prior notification reflecting the outlier information, the slave notification distribution means includes the first prior notification, the third prior notification, and the first notification as the prior notification excluding the second prior notification. Selecting one of the prior notifications, the second prior notification, and the prior notification including the fourth prior notification different from the third prior notification,
The prior notification replacement means is:
When it is determined that at least one of the third destination notification or the fourth destination notification is notified by the notification means, and a predetermined condition is satisfied,
When it is determined that only the fourth destination notification or only the first destination notification exists in addition to the fourth destination notification after the special region, the first destination notification and the special region in the special region Replacing the outside fourth notification with the notification means,
When the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification exist after the special area, the first destination notification in the special area and the third destination notification or the fourth destination outside the special area Replacing at least one of the notifications with the notification means,
When the fourth display notification is present in the special area, the display control means has the fourth notification in the special area when the variable display time related to the second notification is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B8, wherein the special effect having a higher probability of becoming the advantageous content is displayed than when not.

  According to the feature B9, since the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification may be notified by the notification means, it is possible to further diversify the game. Further, when the fourth destination notification is present in the special area, the probability that the content is more advantageous than when the fourth destination notification is present in the special area, for example, when the third destination notification is present in the special area. Since a high special effect is displayed, the game can be further diversified.

  Feature B10. In the case where the follower notification allocating means is a prior notice reflecting the outlier information, it is determined that the third prior notice is reported by the notifying means, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature B9, wherein the fourth destination notification is selected.

  According to the feature B10, the fourth destination notification is notified only after the third destination notification is notified, and the third destination notification is more effective when the fourth destination notification exists in the special area. Since a special effect is displayed with a higher probability of being more advantageous than when it exists in the special area, even if a third destination notification occurs, the player expects that a fourth destination notification will occur. Continue. When the fourth destination notification occurs, attention is paid to the game while expecting the fourth destination notification to be replaced with the first destination notification in the special area, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature B11. The notification means is a part of the design display means, and the prior notification is displayed on the design display means,
The display control means relates to the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification when the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification are displayed in the special area by the destination notification replacement means. After displaying a pre-special effect (confrontation effect), the third destination notification becomes an advantageous content (a victory effect), and the first effect included in the special effect (the third destination notification is victory), or the fourth destination Replacing effect means for displaying one effect of the second effect (the 4th notification is winning) included in the special effect, with the notice being advantageous content (win effect) (the hold notification symbol of the display control device 93 is confronted) When the variable display times related to the second destination notification are started, the special effect including the previous notification that is the advantageous content of the first effect and the second effect is displayed. Described in feature B9 or B10 Of the game machine.

  According to the feature B11, when the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification are present in the special area, the special special effects related to the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification are displayed. The prior special effects of the third destination notification and the fourth destination notification can be noted. For this reason, a player's interest in a game can be improved.

  Feature B12. Any one of the features B1 to B11, wherein the prior notification replacement means causes the notification means to replace the continuous prior notifications in the notified order or to repeat the replacement. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B12, replacement of previous notifications (for example, first and third notifications, first and fourth notifications) in the notified order occurs. For this reason, it becomes easy for the player to grasp which destination notification is replaced, and it is possible to suppress confusion due to the replacement of the previous notification. Further, when the replacement of the previous notifications is repeated, it is possible to give the player a game of predicting where the notification will be finally made (whether to stop). In particular, when the configuration such as the feature B4 is provided, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the third destination notification (and the fourth destination notification) is notified as the previous notification in the special area, The player's interest in games can be improved.

Feature B13. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player;
An operation effective period determining means for determining an operation effective period of the operation means (function for executing an operation effective lottery process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92);
Operation notifying means (function for executing operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) for notifying the operation by the notifying means after determining the operation valid period,
As one of the predetermined conditions, the destination notification replacement unit determines that the operation unit has been operated by a player during the operation effective period determined by the operation effective period determination unit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B12, wherein the notification means is notified by exchanging the first notification and the first notification different from the first and second notifications. .

  According to the feature B13, the first notification, the first notification, and the second notification are performed on the condition that the operation notification for causing the player to operate the operation means is made and the player operates the operation means. And different prior notifications (third and fourth prior notifications) are exchanged. For this reason, the player pays attention to the game while expecting an operation notification to occur when a previous notification different from the first and second notifications occurs. When the operation notification is generated, the player operates the operation means, and the first destination notification and the first notification different from the first destination notification and the second destination notification are switched. A game of operating the means is added, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, if the player does not want to generate a replacement effect in which the first notification and the first notification and the second notification different from the first notification (third and fourth notifications) are not generated, You can also choose not to operate the means. For this reason, in the case of having a configuration such as feature B5 or B6, the player senses that a win will occur in advance by generating a replacement effect, or thoroughly enjoys the effect without generating a replacement effect. Can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Feature B14. If the destination notification replacement means determines that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation effective period determined by the operation effective period determination means as one of the predetermined conditions, After the operation effective period has passed, the first notification and the first notification different from the first notification and the second notification are exchanged to cause the notification means to notify the feature B13 Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B14, even if the player cannot operate the operation means for some reason, after the operation effective period has passed since the operation notification is given, the first destination notification, the first destination notification, and the second destination notification are performed. Prior notification (third and fourth prior notification) is replaced with prior notification. For this reason, for example, when there is a second destination notification reflecting the hit information as in the feature B8, or when there is a first destination notification reflecting the hit information in the special area, the third destination notification is generated. When this is done, it is possible to suppress losing the significance of the third destination notification, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of incongruity in production.

Feature B15. A launch control means (game ball launch mechanism 44) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player;
A first start entrance portion (first start port 54) and a second start entrance portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; Prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when a game ball enters the first starting entrance part, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start entrance part. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein the gaming machine is acquired.

  According to the feature B15, since at least the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, the chance of acquiring special information can be increased.

  Feature B16. The game area is provided with a game ball guiding section (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. The gaming machine according to Feature B15.

  According to the feature B16, the player can easily cause the game ball to enter the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently and the opportunity for many grant determinations to be performed can be obtained.

Feature B17. The game area has a entrance where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball that has entered from the entrance and rotated in a first direction by a predetermined angle, and rotates to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The game ball is guided to the first start entrance part by the above, and the game ball entered from the entrance is received in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. The gaming machine according to Feature B16, wherein the gaming ball is guided to the second starting entrance part.

  According to the feature B17, it is possible to guide and distribute the game balls alternately to the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion using a common member. For this reason, compared with the case where the member which distributes a game ball is provided in the 1st starting entrance part and the 2nd starting entrance part, respectively, reduction of a number of parts can be aimed at.

  Feature B18. The game ball guiding unit is located at a position facing the game ball that has entered the entrance, in a state where the game ball guiding unit is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the game ball that has entered and is predetermined in the second direction. A first passive portion (accommodating portion 64a) that rotates to an angle and a position that faces the game ball that has entered the entrance, in a state where it has been rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction, and the game ball that has entered And a second passive part (accommodating part 64b) that rotates in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the entrance. Before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction before the game ball enters the entrance after the second passive part rotates in the first direction. Rotation restricting means (a magnet 64c, a base side magnet 65) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction. The gaming machine according to the features B17, characterized in that it has a).

  According to the feature B18, since the rotation restricting means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball, and then the game ball enters the entrance. It is suppressed that it rotates before doing. That is, it can suppress turning without receiving a game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters continuously into one of the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently enter the game balls alternately into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section.

(3) Feature C group Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state is triggered when a gaming ball enters a starting port provided in the gaming area. A lottery of whether or not to shift is performed. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed in which (stop result) is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is so-called winning game state winning, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the start port while the display device is performing a variable display of information, information used for winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) as an upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is to be (held). When the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variation display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (for example, (See JP 2004-81853 A).

  In such a gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the player's attention to the game, and the feature C group solves the problem.

Feature C1. Progress control means (MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for controlling the progress of the game based on repeatedly executing the progress processing (timer interrupt processing in each of the above embodiments);
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of S404 and S410 in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (special symbol reservation ball storage area 114b) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a prescribed number set to an integer value greater than 1,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the success / failure information group in the allocation information, and a plurality of the special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit In some cases, a grant determination means (a function for executing a special information determination process in the MPU 112 of the main controller 91) that sequentially executes the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant correspondence result that the special information to be judged corresponds to the success / failure information group, a bonus game (for example, a long time mode) A privilege granting means (a function for executing the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 91) for providing the variable winning device 56 at the opening / closing execution mode).
Predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit is stored in the acquisition information storage unit or information corresponding to a determination result when the grant determination target is obtained. Destination specifying means (main control) for identifying information corresponding to a determination result when predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the grant determination A function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 112 of the apparatus 91),
A notification means (symbol display device 80) reflects a destination notification reflecting a specification result by the destination specifying means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes a target of the determination of grant. ) And a previous notification control means (a function of executing a hold command response process of the voice lamp control device 92 and a function of notifying a hold symbol in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93).
The prior notification control means includes
Based on the specification result by the destination specifying means, the destination notification reflecting the specification result is selected from a plurality of different destination notifications by a destination notification allocating means (a destination in the MPU 152 of the audio lamp control device 92). A function to execute a process of distributing notifications), and
In the case where at least two different prior notifications are notified by the notification means, a replacement process is performed in which when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the prior notification is replaced with a predetermined combination and the notification means is notified. And a prior notification replacement means (function for executing replacement processing of the sound lamp control device 92).

  According to the characteristic C1, the prior notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. In the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order of the determination of grant is the subject of grant determination for the later special information is first A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree with respect to a player's game can be improved. Further, when at least two different prior notifications are notified by the notification means, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that there is a possibility that the prior notification is replaced with a predetermined combination and notified. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; In the configuration including the “information acquisition means”, instead of the configuration of “acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”, “the game ball enters the start ball entrance portion” It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which special information is acquired based on what has been done.

  Feature C2. When the previous notification is replaced and notified in a predetermined combination by the previous notification replacement means, in the replaced previous notification, an expectation to notify the degree of expectation that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group The gaming machine according to Feature C1, further comprising a degree notification control unit (a function of notifying an expectation degree of the display control device 93).

  According to the feature C2, when the previous notification is replaced with a predetermined combination and notified, the degree of expectation that the special information corresponds to the success / failure information group is notified. For this reason, since the player needs a plurality of prior notifications to form a predetermined combination, it is easy to continue the game. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Feature C3. Operation means (first frame button 26) that can be operated by the player;
An operation effective period determining means for determining an operation effective period of the operation means (function for executing an operation effective lottery process in the MPU 152 of the sound lamp control device 92);
Operation notifying means (function for executing operation notification in the MPU 162 of the display control device 93) for notifying the operation by the notifying means after determining the operation valid period,
When the destination notification replacement unit determines that the operation unit is operated by a player during the operation effective period determined by the operation effective period determination unit as one of the predetermined conditions, The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the notification is switched to a predetermined order and the notification means is notified.

  According to the feature C3, the operation notification that causes the player to operate the operation means is given, and the previous notification is switched to a predetermined order on the condition that the player operates the operation means. For this reason, a game of operating the operating means is added to the player, and the game can be diversified. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The player can also select not to operate the operation means when he does not want to generate a replacement effect. For this reason, when the configuration of the feature C2 is provided, the player selects whether to detect the expectation that the hit result will be generated in advance by generating the replacement effect or to enjoy the effect without generating the replacement effect. it can. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game, and to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

  Feature C4. If the destination notification replacement means determines that the operation means has not been operated by the player during the operation effective period determined by the operation effective period determination means as one of the predetermined conditions, The gaming machine according to Feature C3, wherein after the operation valid period has elapsed, the prior notification is replaced in a predetermined order and the notification means is notified.

  According to the feature C4, even if the player cannot operate the operation means for some reason, the prior notification is switched to a predetermined order after the operation valid period has elapsed after the operation notification. For this reason, generation | occurrence | production of the sense of incongruity on production can be suppressed.

Feature C5. A launch control means (game ball launch mechanism 44) for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player;
A first start entrance portion (first start port 54) and a second start entrance portion (second start port 55) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; Prepared,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information when a game ball enters the first starting entrance part, and acquires the special information when the game ball enters the second start entrance part. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the gaming machine is acquired.

  According to the feature C5, since at least the first starting ball entering portion and the second starting ball entering portion are provided as the starting ball entering portions, the chance of acquiring special information can be increased.

  Feature C6. The game area is provided with a game ball guiding section (passive distribution member 64) for alternately entering game balls into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section. A gaming machine according to Feature C5.

  According to the feature C6, the player easily causes the game ball to enter the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion by causing the game ball to flow down to the game area. For this reason, special information can be acquired efficiently and the opportunity for many grant determinations to be performed can be obtained.

Feature C7. The game area has a entrance where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
The game ball guiding portion receives a game ball that has entered from the entrance and rotated in a first direction by a predetermined angle, and rotates to a predetermined angle in a second direction opposite to the first direction. The game ball is guided to the first start entrance part by the above, and the game ball entered from the entrance is received in a state of being rotated in the second direction, and is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the gaming ball is guided to the second starting entrance part.

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to guide and distribute game balls alternately to the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion using a common member. For this reason, compared with the case where the member which distributes a game ball is provided in the 1st starting entrance part and the 2nd starting entrance part, respectively, reduction of a number of parts can be aimed at.

  Feature C8. The game ball guiding unit is located at a position facing the game ball that has entered the entrance, in a state where the game ball guiding unit is rotated by a predetermined angle in the first direction, and receives the game ball that has entered and is predetermined in the second direction. A first passive portion (accommodating portion 64a) that rotates to an angle and a position that faces the game ball that has entered the entrance, in a state where it has been rotated by a predetermined angle in the second direction, and the game ball that has entered And a second passive part (accommodating part 64b) that rotates in the first direction to a predetermined angle, and after the first passive part rotates in the second direction, a game ball enters the entrance. Before the first passive part is prevented from rotating in the first direction before the game ball enters the entrance after the second passive part rotates in the first direction. Rotation restricting means (a magnet 64c, a base side magnet 65) that prevents the second passive portion from rotating in the second direction. The gaming machine according to the features C7, characterized in that it has a).

  According to the feature C8, since the rotation restricting means is provided, the first passive portion and the second passive portion rotate after receiving the game ball, and then the game ball enters the entrance. It is suppressed that it rotates before doing. That is, it can suppress turning without receiving a game ball. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball enters continuously into one of the first start ball entering part or the second start ball entering part. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently enter the game balls alternately into the first start ball entering section and the second start ball entering section.

  Further, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the gaming machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.
<Others>
Conventionally, for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, whether or not to make a transition to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state when a gaming ball enters the starting port provided in the gaming area A lottery will be held. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result in the final stop display of the variation display A display effect for one game time is displayed in which (stop result) is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is so-called winning game state winning, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.
In addition, when a game ball enters the start port while the display device is performing a variable display of information, information used for winning lottery is stored with a predetermined number (for example, four) as an upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is to be (held). When the information used for the winning lottery is stored, after the variation display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the stored information, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-81853).
Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game.
This technical idea aims at providing the gaming machine which can raise the attention degree to a game favorably in view of the above-mentioned point.
<Means>
In order to achieve the above object, in the gaming machine of the technical idea 1, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and the special information acquired by the information acquisition means is 1 An acquisition information storage means for storing a prescribed number set to a larger integer value as an upper limit, and whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to the success / failure information group in the assignment information And when the plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the grant determination means for sequentially executing the grant determination on the plurality of special information, and the grant determination means Grant grant that grants a bonus game to a player based on the grant determination result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the success / failure information group And information corresponding to a determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition unit and stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the determination of the grant, or stored in the acquisition information storage unit Destination specifying means for specifying information corresponding to a determination result in a case where the predetermined special information being subjected to the grant determination is specified at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the subject of the grant determination And at the timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination, the notification means notifies the destination notification reflecting the specification result by the destination specifying means. Destination notification control means, and the destination notification control means reflects the identification result based on the identification result by the identification destination means. The first notification and the second notification are selected from the first notification and the second notification, and the first notification and the second notification are notified by the notification device. If the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first notification device and the second notification device are switched to notify the notification device, and a notification device replacement device is provided for executing a replacement process. It is characterized by that.
<Effect>
According to this, the prior notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not subject to the grant determination is performed at a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. Notification is made by the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order of the determination of grant is the subject of grant determination for the later special information is first displayed. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to a player's game can be improved.
In addition, when the second destination notification occurs, it is possible to provide a novel gameability that the second destination notification may be replaced with another first destination notification. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be further improved, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.
A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; In the configuration including the “information acquisition means”, instead of the configuration of “acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”, “the game ball enters the start ball entrance portion” It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which special information is acquired based on what has been done.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 54 ... First start port, 55 ... Second start port, 80 ... Symbol display device, 91 ... Main control device, 92 ... Audio lamp control device, 93 ... Display control device, 112 ... M
PU (main-side MPU), 113 ... ROM (main-side ROM), 114 ... RAM (main-side RAM),
152 ... MPU (audio side MPU), 153 ... ROM (audio side ROM), 154 ... RAM (
(Voice side RAM), 162 MPU (display side MPU), 163... Program ROM, 164.
Work RAM, 114b ... secondary special symbol reserved ball storage area, Ds1 to Ds8 ... first to eighth reserved symbol display area, RC1 to RC8 ... secondary first to secondary reserved area.

Claims (2)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired the special information of said information acquiring means, and acquiring information storing means capable of storing predetermined number as an upper limit,
And viable giving judgment means for applying determines whether corresponds to spruce information group in the special information giving information stored in the acquired information storage means,
Benefit granting means for granting a bonus game to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means being a specific grant determination result;
The information given special information stored before Symbol acquiring information storage means corresponds to the judgment result in the case where the object of the grant decision, before the predetermined special information are subject to the grant decision A destination specifying means to specify at the timing of,
A destination capable of executing a destination notification reflecting a result of specification by the destination specifying means at a timing before the predetermined judgment information to be specified by the destination specifying means is determined by the grant determining means. Notification means;
A prior notification control means capable of controlling the notification mode of the prior notification executed by the prior notification means ,
The prior notification control means includes
A gaming machine characterized in that at least one of a first destination notification mode and a second destination notification mode different from the first destination notification mode can be selected as the notification mode of the previous notification . The destination notification means can execute the destination notification for each of the plurality of special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
The destination notification control means satisfies a predetermined condition in a state where the destination notification in the first destination notification mode and the destination notification in the second destination notification mode are executed by the destination notification means. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a replacement control for switching the first destination notification mode and the second destination notification mode can be executed.